Upload
mlgovardhan
View
229
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 1/439
SAP AG 2004
CR700 – CRM Service
SAPCRM mySAP CRM SolutionOverview
THE BEST RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP
© SAP AG 2006
CR700
CRM Service
mySAP CRM 2005 2006/Q2
50079970
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 2/439
SAP AG 2004
Copyright 2005 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or for any purpose without the express permission of
SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
Copyright
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.
Microsoft, Windows, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390,
OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli,
and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web
Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology
invented and implemented by Netscape.
MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden.
…
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 3/439
…
SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein
as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in
several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the
trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational
purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG andits affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or
warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the
materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional warranty.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 4/439
SAP AG 2004
Prerequisites
Prerequisites:
CR100 – Base CustomizingRecommended:
Study of learning maps for SAP CRM 4.0 and mySAP CRM 2005 to
learn the features and functions
Customers and partners can register and access the learning
maps via the SAP Service Marketplace:
http://service.sap.com
http://service.sap.com/rkt-crm
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 5/439
SAP AG 2004
Target Groups and Duration
Target Groups:
SAP customers and potential SAP customers planning animplementation of CRM Service
Customers and consultants who need detailed knowledge about
processes in CRM Service
Duration:
5 days
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 6/439
SAP AG 2004
Course Outline
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 7/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-1
SAP AG 2004
Overview of CRM Service
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 8/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-2
SAP AG 2004
CRM Service
Overview of CRM Service
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 9/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 10/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-4
SAP AG 2004
Your enterprise has selected SAP CRM as its
customer relationship management solution. Youwould like to become familiar with the key
capabilities of CRM Service.
Overview of CRM Service: Business Scenario
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 11/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-5
SAP AG 2004
SAP CRM Overview
mySAP CRM 2005 offers several functions and channels.• Channels:
- Channel Management (for example, partner management)
- Field applications (mobile or offline devices for field agents)
- Interaction Center (IC WinClient and IC WebClient with telephony and e-mail integration)
- E-commerce (Web-enabled sales and service functions)
• Functions:
- Marketing (for example, campaign management)
- Sales (for example, opportunity management)
- Service (for example, service order management)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 12/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-6
SAP AG 2004
Functionality (Business Map)
Focus of this course:
CRM Service core functionality
The figure above shows the business map for mySAP CRM 2005. Business maps with detailed descriptions are available at http://www.sap.com.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 13/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-7
SAP AG 2004
System Components
Plug-In*
ERP System
- Human Resources
- Logistics Execution
- Financial Accounting
- Controlling
CRM Middleware
CRM System
- Service Processes
- Resource Planning
- Interaction Center
SAPBW
SD
CRM Analytics
People-Centric
User InterfaceService
FunctionalityBack-End Functions
* Release-dependent
SAP
NetWeaver
Portal
The CRM system offers core functions that can be applied through different interaction channels. Analytical capabilities with predefined BI content are provided by SAP NetWeaver Business
Intelligence.
The SAP NetWeaver Portal allows customers to use the People-Centric User Interface (browser-based
use of CRM functions together with integrated portal functions).
The ERP system can be SAP ECC or an SAP R/3 system. This system contains functions supporting
CRM Service scenarios, for example, Materials Management (spare parts), Cross-Application Time
Sheet (service confirmation), and financial and controlling functions.
Depending on the release of the ERP system, it might be necessary to install an R/3 plug-in. Plug-in
information can be found at http://service.sap.com/r3-plug-in.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 14/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 15/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-9
SAP AG 2004
Overview of CRM Service: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Present an overview of CRM Service
Describe the different CRM Service user interface options
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 16/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-10
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 17/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-11
Exercises
Unit: Overview of CRM Service
Topic: Working with the People-Centric UI
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Gather information using the People-Centric UI
• Create a service order
You want to familiarize yourself with the People-Centric User Interface
using the SAP NetWeaver.You need to log on to the portal with a predefined user, search, and makecertain entries.
1-1 Start the People-Centric User Interface as a service representative.
1-1-1 Start a Web browser and enter the URL provided to you by your instructor.
1-1-2 Log on to the portal with a predefined service user.
1-2 View the information on installed base components. Using the Advanced Search, find
the installed base with external ID ##MEGASTORE and display the details.
1-2-1 What is the component ID of the installed base component
Motherboard M-3100?
______________
1-2-2 Is a warranty assigned to the monitor component?
1-2-3 Add the installed base to your favorites.
1-3 Create a service order of type Service Process for your customer, ##Megastore. The
motherboard of a PC installation you analyzed previously fails frequently.
1-3-1 Create the service order and enter product SRV1_4 with quantity 1 AU.
1-3-2 Choose the component ID from Exercise 1-2 as reference object Component .
1-3-3 Change the status of the service order. Release and save the service order.
1-4 (Optional) Create the same kind of service order using the SAP GUI.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 18/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-12
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 19/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-13
Solutions
Unit: Overview of CRM Service
Topic: Working with the People-Centric UI
1-1 Start the People-Centric User Interface as a service representative.
1-1-1 Start a Web browser and enter the URL provided to you by your instructor.
1-1-2 Log on to the portal with a predefined service user.
1-2 View information on the installed base components. Using the Advanced Search, find
the installed base with external ID ##MEGASTORE and display the details.
1-2-1 What is the component ID of the installed base component
Motherboard M-3100?
Choose Installed Bases → Installed Bases/Components.
Choose Show Advanced Search.
External ID: ##MEGASTORE
Choose Go.
Choose Hide Advanced Search.
Choose Go To → Details.
Choose Expand to expand the first installed base component.
You will find the component ID in the Component field.
1-2-2 Is a warranty assigned to the monitor component?
Select the line item that contains the Monitor component.
Choose the Warranties tab.
The installed base component has no warranty assigned.
1-2-3 Add the installed base to your favorites.
Select the line item that contains the installed base header.
Choose Favorite → Add to Favorites.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 20/439
© SAP AG CR700 1-14
1-3 Create a service order of type Service Process for your customer, ##Megastore. The
motherboard of a PC installation you analyzed previously fails frequently.
1-3-1 Create the service order and enter product SRV1_4 with quantity 1 AU.
Choose Service Processing → Service Orders.
Choose New → Service Process.
Sold-To Party: ##Megastore
Description: First Service Order ##
In the Products section (scroll down), choose Add Entry.
Product : SRV1_4
Quantity: 1
Choose ENTER to confirm your data.
1-3-2 Choose the ID from Exercise 1-2 as reference object Component .
Component : <id of component>
1-3-3 Change the status of the service order. Release and save the service order.
Choose the Service Status button and then choose the Release button (scroll
up).
Choose Save.
1-4 (Optional) Create the same kind of service order using the SAP GUI.
Log on to the CRM system.
Choose SAP Menu → Service → Maintain Service Processes.
Choose Extras → Locator → Minimize.
Choose Create . Then choose Service Process → Service Process.
Description: First Service Order ##
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Component : <id of component>
Item Details
Product : SRV1_4
Quantity: 1
Choose ENTER .
Choose the Status button and then choose the Released button.
Choose Save.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 21/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-1
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base Management and Individual Objects
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 22/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-2
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base Management and Individual Objects
Installed Base Management
Individual Objects
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 23/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-3
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base Management and Individual Objects:Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of installed bases
Create and work with an installed base
Use the basic customizing settings for installed bases
Explain the concept of individual objects
Configure individual objects
Describe the equipment load
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 24/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-4
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base Management and Individual Objects:Business Scenario
Your customers have technical objects for which services must be performed.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 25/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-5
SAP AG 2004
Example of an Installed Base
Client Server Installation xyzSold-to party: Company 4711
Status: Operating
Contact person: John Summer
Address: Walldorf, Neurottstr. 16
Contact person: Pat Winter
Address: Rot, Max-Planck-Str. 1Application Server 02
Hard drive 50GB
RAM
Motherboard
Windows NT
Application Server 01
Hard drive 40GB
RAM
Motherboard
Unix
Identification: HD-98765
Identification: HD-43210
Individual Object ...
Installed Base ...
Text ...
Product ...
Installed BaseProduct Component
Text Component
Individual Object
Structure Gap
RAM: Dismantled
You can use the installed bases to store your customer’s structures and objects, as shown in the above
example for technical equipment.
You can use different types of components within Installed Bases:
• Product components
• Text components
- Text components can also be used to structure an installed base.
• An installed base as a component of another installed base.
• Individual objects
- An individual object can only be assigned to one installed base component; therefore, individual
objects may not be copied.
• Structure gap
- Structure gaps are used to leep knowledge about the characteristic and the place in a structure of
an installed base component, even if the component is dismantled for exchange, repair, or
maintenance.
• Customer-specific component types.
- Customer-specific component types are, for example, cars, washing machines, telephones, and so
on. These can be grouped in object families.
- An object family can be assigned to multiple categories
You can mix all component types in any way within one structure.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 26/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-6
SAP AG 2004
Components
Product
Text
Installed base
Individual object
Structure gap
Components
Header
Category
External ID
Description
Status (system/user)
Authorization group
Partners
Address
Documents
Partners
Address
Documents
Structure of Installed Bases
The installed bases at the uppermost level (header) are used to structure the customer or business partner(for example, company X, department Y, building M, or branch A).
The installed base components are found at a lower level.
The set of installed objects at the customer’s site can be used to:
• Determine the exact object for which a problem has been reported
• Determine – in detail – to what the transaction refers (for example, visit by field service
representative or repair by a service employee)
• Determine which object is affected and the parts it consists of (important information for technicians)
• Document changes made to objects
In addition to direct use for individual service processes with the customer, installed base data alsoforms the basis for additional evaluations, such as activities covered by service contracts and statistics.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 27/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-7
SAP AG 2004
Qualifications
Warranties
Counters
Installed Base Component Relationships
Qualification:
Speaks Spanish
fluently
Qualification:Good hardware knowledge
Photocopier; printer
Installed
Base
Component
Qualifications
Warranties
Counters
Creation and linking of qualification requirements for a service employee to an installed base or
components
Qualification requirements for the service employee:
• Determine the qualifications required by a service employee for servicing an installed base or the
components of an installed base, for example, welding permission.
• Check in the resource planning tool to see that the required qualifications for processing a service
order for a component match the actual qualifications of the assigned service employee.
Creation and linking of warranties to components of an installed base
Warranties may contain one ore more of the following:
• A defined validity period; a link to an uniquely identified product, installation or object
• Coverage terms for parts, labor, and travel
• Influence of pricing and financial management; purchasing information and tracking of aggregate
warranty cost
Option of assigning counters to components of an installed base Data from counter readings are available for:
• Follow-up scenarios:
- Trigger maintenance order when specified counter reading is reached
- Check warranty claims (for example, based on operating hours).
• Evaluation scenarios:
- Reporting on usage, capacity
- Calculation of consumption.
• CRM billing from service documents:
- Based on counter readings (for example, consumption).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 28/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-8
SAP AG 2004
Measuring Point
Counter Types
Measuring points have indicator character:
Non-monotone value outcomes
No overflow value
Typical measuring points:
Thermometer, Speedometer
Special case of a measuring point:
Oil meter reader:
Generally monotone decreasing but
with monotone and non-monotone times
Overflow value
Miles
Hour
Speedometer
(Miles/Hour)
Counters are measuring points withcounter character:
Monotone, sequenced value outcomes
Overflow value
Planned value
Integrated value check which definescounter as:
Forward counter
Backward counter
Typical counters:
Odometer, electricity meter (forward
counter)
Water meter (backward counter)
Odometer (Miles)
Water Meter (Cubic Meter)
Counter
Counter overflow indicates the value when the counter is reset to a defined value (usually to zero),
assuming it is a forward counter. A backward counter resets to the overflow value when it reaches a
defined value (usually when it reaches zero).
• Example (automobile’s odometer): As soon as the value reaches 99,999,99 (maximum value) the
next value that displays will be 0,00 (minimum value). The overflow only affects the visible value
displayed on the physical counter.
The system tracks the overall value (100,000,00). An indicator cannot have an overflow value.
- Minimum counter value and maximum counter value:
Minimum value and maximum value allowed for this counter. The behavior is different for a
measuring point (indicator) or a counter.
For both, no reading will be accepted with a visible value on a reading less than the minimum
value.
For a counter, if it is a backward counter and the visible value on the reading is greater than thevisible value on the previous reading, it is assumed that a rollover has occurred and the overall
value is increased accordingly.
Planned counter value is the planned or target value. This may be used in validation rules or for
statistical comparison with actual values. For a counter, one must also specify a planned time frame for
the planned value.
• Example (planned time frame for planned value): 99,999,99 km (planned value) per, for example, 1
year (planned time frame). Use the Planed Time field (for example, 1) in combination with the Time
Unit field (for example, year) in the Create Counter view (the fields are not relevant for indicators
because they do not have any time dependencies).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 29/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-9
SAP AG 2004
Counter
Views
Counter Views
Business Transaction
View
Reading
Administration
Header / item details:
Service order
Service confirmation
Service plan
Counter
Administration
Counter creation Measuring point or counter
Counter category
Min, max, overflow value
Planned counter value / time
Master Data View
Counter readings
Description
Date of reading
Origin / reading transaction
Created by
Counter creation
Counter assignment
Counter readings
Installed base component,
Individual object or product master
Counter creation
Counter assignment
Counter readings
You can reach the counter and reading administration by choosing SAP Menu→
Master Data→
Counter → Maintain Counter or by using transaction /ncrm_mpk_admin.
Counters can be assigned.
To be able to maintain counters and readings in business transactions, set the Show Counter indicator
either on transaction-type or item-category level (transaction category Service Process).
Counter readings relevant to execution of services are recorded for various purposes:
• Recording mileage during technical inspection of a car
• Recording energy consumption (household gas or electricity readings)
• Assessing warranty claims based on consumption (for example, car warranty is only valid for the
first 30,000 miles)• Scheduling service plans (for example, next maintenance work should be scheduled after 1000
operating hours)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 30/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-10
SAP AG 2004
Comparison of two installed bases
Backdating changes to an installed base
Inheritance of addresses and partners
Plausibility check in structuring objects by object families
Expand installed bases
Creation / change of an installed base with reference to a
sales transaction
Automatic installed base update from a service order
Additional Installed Base Functions
Comparison of two installed bases:• Display two different statuses for one installed base for two different times and compare them
• Changes to installed base structure (for example, movement of components)
Changing an installed base in the past:
• Changes to an installed base can be backdated until the last change of the installed base. The action
log shows who and what was changed.
Inheritance of addresses and partners:
• Inheritance is logical (invisible) and is only supported within search helps, for example, in the
Interaction Center; refer to SAP Note 701914 for details
Plausibility check in structuring objects by object families:
• Choose SAP Implementation Guide
→
Customer Relationship Management→
Master Data→
Installed Base→ Installed Base Category → Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules
Expanding installed bases:
• Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Expand Installed Base
Creating / changing an installed base with reference to a sales transaction:
• Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Maintain Installed Base with Reference to
Sales Transactions
Automatic installed base update from service order:
• Triggered through action AUTO_IBASE_UPDATE in action profile (SERVICE_ORDER)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 31/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-11
SAP AG 2004
Individual Objects
Individual object:
A unique instance of a product that exists only once
Relationships with:
Business partner
Structure of an
individual object
Counter Warranties
Qualification
requirements
Individual object:• A unique instance of a product, for example, a vehicle, a PC, or a serialized spare part
• Central reference for the sales, service, and marketing transactions between a company and a
business partner
• Has a reference to product data
• Allows flexible modeling of object data (attributes and set types)
• Relationships with:
- Business partner
- Structure of an individual object
- Counter
- Warranties
- Qualification requirements
• Object history
It is possible to use alternative IDs for individual objects, for example, a VIN or self-defined identifiers
Individual objects are integrated in:
• Sales and service processes
• Different interaction channels (e-service, Interaction Center, SAP CRM Mobile Service)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 32/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-12
SAP AG 2004
Product vs. Individual object
Installed Base: Individual Object vs. Product
Individual ObjectProduct
e.g., unique IP address of a computer e.g., size of RAM of a computer
An individual object provides specific
data, valid for only one, uniquely
identified, single object
A product contains information on the
features of goods or services
The product contains general information about the goods or services it describes. However,it cannot make a statement about individual objects that could possibly exist for the product.
Individual data that is valid for exactly one object is stored in the individual object.
That means that an individual object is generally identified by a number, fixed relationship, or
description. For example:
• ID number: A computer monitor with the manufacturer's serial number 123ZGK654
• Location: Mr. Smith's washing machine at 25 George Street, London. Although the washing
machine does not have a serial number, it is not likely to be confused with any other washing
machine.
• Building with address: In addition, individual objects can be used to represent objects relevant to the
business environment that are not actually service or sales process objects. You can categorize individual objects in object families with the same types of object (for example,
household appliances and software licenses).
You can define the attributes that are relevant to each object family for the description of associated
individual objects as individual fields.
Each individual object belongs to an object family.
• Settings made at the object family level determine which fields can be maintained for the objects.
• All other settings related to objects are also made at the object-family level.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 33/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-13
SAP AG 2004
Maintenance of Individual Objects
Individual Object Maintenance (Create / Change) Within Installed Base Management
SAP GUI
PC UI
Individual Object Maintenance (Create)
PC UI
Individual Object Maintenance (Change)
SAP GUI (Product Workbench)
PC UI
1. Define Object Family
2. Define Attributes / Set Type
3. Create Product Category and Assign Object Family and Set Type
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Cross-
Application Components SAP Products Individual Objects Define Object
Families (IMG Documentation!)
Creation of individual objects that do not belong to a installed base is only possible using thecorresponding BSP application (within People-Centric UI).
The IMG documentation Define Object Families gives a detailed, step-by-step description of how to
customize individual objects.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 34/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-14
SAP AG 2004
Location Information
Postal Address
Geolocation
Configuration of geocoding• Choose SAP Implementation Guide → SAP Web Application Server → General Settings → Set
Geocoding .
- Register the geocoding programs in the system and assign them to countries
- Edit the address fieds for geocoding
- Edit the geographical data of countries and regions
• Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Master Data →
Products → Individual Objects → Define Location Determination for Individual Objects.
- Automatic calculation of geocoding per object family
• To be able to see the address and the geocodes in the individual object workbench, assign the settypes COM_LOCAT_ADDR and COM_LOCAT_GEO to the product category.
- Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Products → Maintain Categories and Hierarchies.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 35/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-15
SAP AG 2004
Object Fact Sheet (People-Centric UI)
The object fact sheet gives a summarized overview of all relevant data regarding a customer’s serviceobjects:
• Object details
• Location
• Contact person
• Business partners
• Service order history
• Service contracts
• Warranties
The object fact sheet can be adapted.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 36/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-16
SAP AG 2004
ERP Integration via CRM Middleware:
Migration of ERP equipment into CRM installed bases
Initial and permanent load
Equipment number (ERP) = Object ID (CRM)
Changes in CRM can be transferred back to ERP
Equipment Download
ERP
Equipment
CRM
Installed base
- Individual object
The equipment load has to be activated.
Detailed information on the equipment load can be found at:
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Master Data → Installed
Base → Replication of Equipment from SAP ECC Customer Service (CS) → Prerequisites and
General Information for Equipment Replication
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 37/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-17
SAP AG 2004
Checklist for Equipment Load
Harmonize product hiearchy settings(DNL_CUST_PROD1)
Step 1:
Settings for equipment replicationStep 2:
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Master
Data Installed Base Replication of Equipment from SAP ECC Customer
Service (CS) Define Default Settings for Equipment Replication
Activate BAdI implementation(CRM_EQUI_LOAD_STDIMP)
Step 3:
SE18 / SE19 with BAdI: CRM_EQUI_LOAD
For additional upload: Activate adapter objects(DNL_EQUIPMENT; DNL_EQUI_HIER)
Step 4:
SAP Menu Architecture and Technology Middleware Data
Exchange Object Management Business Objects
SAP Menu Architecture and Technology Middleware Data
Exchange Initial Load Start
A detailed description of the equipment load between the ERP and CRM System can be found in theImplementation Guide:
• Customer Relationship Management → Master Data → Installed Base → Replication of Equipment
from SAP ECC Customer Service (CS) → Prerequisites and General Information for Equipment
Replication
For a successful load of equipment to the CRM system, relevant master data (for example, business
partners) must be synchronized beforehand.
The BAdI CRM_EQUI_LOAD contains methods that can be used to enhance the equipment data load.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 38/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-18
SAP AG 2004
Installed base category
Assign user status profile
Permitted component types
Assign partner determination procedure
Customer-specific component types
Individual objects
Object families
Attributes
Set types
Installed Base: Customizing Steps
The installed base category differentiates the business use of installed bases.
You can use the SET/GET parameter IBV to set a default value for an installed base category.
Component types are SAP data. The settings control the program flow for each read or write access to
the installed base data. If you want to define your own object types, you must program a function group
and a class.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 39/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-19
SAP AG 2004
Installed Base Management and Individual Objects:Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Describe the concept of installed bases Create and work with an installed base
Use the basic customizing settings for installed bases
Explain the concept of individual objects
Configure individual objects
Describe the equipment load
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 40/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-20
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 41/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-21
Exercises
Unit: Installed Base Management and Individual Objects
Topic: Installed Base Maintenance
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create an installed base with several components
• Create an installed base category with basic Customizing settings
You provide service for different kinds of technical objects for your
customers.
Therefore, you need to maintain installed bases in CRM and becomefamiliar with the functions available.
1-1 Create an installed base for customer ##Megastore and enter different components.
1-1-1 Create an installed base of category 01 (Installed Base) and enter the following
data:
External ID: ##HighTech
Description: ## High Tech
1-1-2 Assign the partner ##Megastore with partner function Sold-to Party to theinstalled base.
1-1-3 Enter two text components, Computer and Copier.
1-1-4 Below the text component Computer, enter product HT-1010 with quantity 1 PC.
Assign warranty WP_001 with warranty start data today to the notebook.
1-1-5 Below the text component Copier enter two individual objects. Enter the
following:
Family: 0401 (Equipment)
Object ID: CM##01
Description: Copier 1
When the Category selection dialog box is displayed, choose category UBBE (UBB
Equipment).
Make a corresponding second entry with Object ID CM##02 and Description
Copier 2
Save the installed base and write down the number:
___________________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 42/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 43/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 44/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-24
SAP Implementation Guide → Cross-Application Components
→ SAP Product → Basic Settings → Register Applicationsor Set Type Generation (People-Centric UI)
Create the following two entries:
CRMM_PRD_IOBJECT < > 01 ZF## 00 < > Version 0000
PRD_IO_01
CRMM_PRD_IOBJECT < > 01 ZF## 00 < > Version 0001
PRD_4ODP1
“< >” are blank entries.
1-1-7 Test your settings and create individual objects.
a. Change an installed base (category 01) in the SAP GUI with one component of
type Individual Object. Choose your newly created object family and an
arbitrary object ID.
b. Create an individual object in the People-Centric UI. Choose your newly
created object family and an arbitrary object ID.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 45/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-25
Solutions
Unit: Installed Base Management and Individual Objects
Topic: Installed Base Maintenance
1-1 Create an installed base for customer ##Megastore and enter different components.
1-1-1 Create an installed base of category 01 (Installed Base) and enter the following
data:
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Create Installed Base.
IBase Category: 01
Choose ENTER .
ExtID: ##HighTech
Desc: ## High Tech
People-Centric UI
Choose Installed Bases → Installed Bases/Components.
Choose Go To → List .
Choose New → Installed Base.
External ID: ##HighTech
IBase Description: ## High Tech
1-1-2 Assign the partner ##Megastore with partner function Sold-to Party to theinstalled base.
SAP GUI
Choose Goto → Partner .
Function: Sold-To Party
Partner : <number of ##Megastore>
Choose Transfer .
People-Centric UI
In the Partners area (or the Partners tab), choose Add Entry.
Partner func.: Sold-To Party
Partner ID: <number of ##Megastore>
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 46/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-26
1-1-3 Enter two text components, Computer and Copier.
SAP GUI
In the area of directly subordinate objects, choose the Text tab.
Description: Computer
Description: Copier
People-Centric UI
Choose New → Text Component .
Description: Computer
Select the installed base header and choose New → Text Component .
Description: Copier
1-1-4 Below the text component Computer, enter product HT-1010 with quantity 1 PC.
SAP GUI
In the structure tree on the left, choose Computer .
In the area of directly subordinate objects choose the Product tab.
Product ID: HT-1010
Quantity: 1 PC
Assign warranty WP_001 with warranty start date today to the notebook.
In the structure tree on the left, choose the Notebook Professional component.
Choose the Relationships button.
Warranty: WP_001
Choose ENTER and observe that the warranty is valid for two years starting today.
People-Centric UI
Select the installed base component Computer and choose New → Product .
Product ID: HT-1010
Quantity/Base Unit : 1 PC
In the Warranties area (or on the Warranties tab) choose Add Entry.
Warranty: WP_001.
Choose ENTER and observe that the warranty is valid for two years starting today.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 47/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-27
1-1-5 Below the text component Copier, enter two individual objects. Enter the
following:
SAP GUI
In the structure tree on the left, choose Copier .
Choose the Directly subordinate objects button.
Choose the Individual Object tab.
Family: 0401 (Equipment)
Object ID: CM##01
Description: Copier 1
When the Category selection dialog box is displayed, choose category UBBE (UBB Equipment).
Family: 0401 (Equipment)
Object ID: CM##02
Description: Copier 2
When the Category selection dialog box is displayed, choose category UBBE (UBB
Equipment).
Save your installed base.
People-Centric UI
Select the installed base component Copier and choose New → CRM Individual
Object .
Component Desc: Copier 1
Object ID: CM##01Object Family: Equipment
When the Category selection dialog box is displayed, choose category UBBE (UBB
Equipment).
Select the installed base component Copier and choose New → CRM IndividualObject .
Component Desc: Copier 2
Object ID: CM##02
Object Family: Equipment
When the Category selection dialog box is displayed, choose category UBBE (UBB
Equipment).
Save your installed base.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 48/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-28
2-1 Perform basic customizing of installed bases.
2-1-1 Create a new installed base category, Installed Base ##, by copying the standard
entry 01 with all dependant entries. Choose the ID from the table below.
Group
Number
Installed Base
Category
Group
Number Installed Base
Category
01 ZA 10 ZJ
02 ZB 11 ZK
03 ZC 12 ZL
04 ZD 13 ZM
05 ZE 14 ZN
06 ZF 15 ZO
07 ZG 16 ZP
08 ZH 17 ZQ
09 ZI 18 ZR
Only allow components of type Product, Text, and CRM Individual Object to beassigned to installed bases of your new type. Remove all other components.
Choose SAP Menu → Architecture and Technology → Configuration →
Customizing .
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management →
Master Data→
Installed Base→
Installed Base Category→
Define Installed BaseCategory and Installation Rules.
Select entry 01 and choose Copy As… .
IBase Category: <choose entry from table above>
Type Description: Installed Base ##
Choose ENTER and confirm the dialog box with copy all .
Confirm and save the data.
Select your newly created installed base category and, in the structure tree on the
left, double-click Permitted Components.
Select the entries 0016 (IBase as Component), 0031 (CRM Structure Gap) and
9990 (Screen Control Installed Base) and choose Delete .
Save the data.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 49/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-29
2-1-2 Assign partner determination procedure 00000032 to your newly created installed
base category.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management →
Master Data → Installed Base → Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category.
Select the entry with IBase Category 01 and choose Copy As… . IBase Category: <choose entry from table above>
Save the data.
2-1-3 Activate (logical) partner inheritance and allow changes to the installed base in the
past for your installed base category.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management →
Master Data → Installed Base → Installed Base Category → Activate Partner and
Address Inheritance, Change in the Past .
Choose New Entries.
IBase Category: <your entry>
PInherit .: check the flag
IB Past (scroll to the right): check the flag
Save the data.
2-1-4 Test your new installed base category and create an installed base.
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Create Installed Base.
IBase Category: <your entry>
Choose ENTER .
Ext.ID: Test IB##
Desc: Test IB##
Assign Sold-To Party ##Megastore to the installed base header and add one
component of type Product. Choose product ID HT-1000.
Choose Goto → Partner .
Function: Sold-To Party
Partner : <number of ##Megastore>
Choose Transfer .
On the Product tab, enter the following:
Product ID: HT-1000
In the structure tree on the left, select the Notebook Basic 15.
Choose Goto → Partner and observe that no partner ID is visible.
Note the number of the component ID:
_______________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 50/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 51/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 52/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-32
1-1-3 Assign the newly created object family to installed base category 01.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management →
Master Data → Installed Base → Individual Objects / Object Family → AssignObject Families to Installed Base Categories.
Choose New Entries:
Typ: 01 Family: ZF##
Save the data.
1-1-4 Define characteristics of object families. Assign icon @AN@ to object family
ZF##.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management →
Master Data → Installed Base → Individual Objects / Object Family → DefineCharacteristics of Object Families.
Choose New Entries.
Family: ZF##
Icon: @AN@
Save the data.
1-1-5 Change the product hierarchy R3PRODSTYP and add another category, ZC##
(##Category), below the root node. Assign both object family ZF## and set type
ZIOSET## (View ID = ZPRINTER) to the new product category.
Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Products → Maintain Categories and
Hierarchies.
Choose Open Hierarchy. Hierarchy ID: R3PRODSTYP
Go into change mode, confirm the warning, and double-click the root category Product subtype.
Choose the New Category button.
Category ID: ZC##
Short text : ##Category
Confirm the data and enter the following:
Product Type: Material Object Family: ## Object Family
Choose the SetTypes tab and Add set type ZIOSET## with view IDZPRINTER (Printer).
Save the data.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 53/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-33
1-1-6 Register applications for set type generation (People-Centric UI) to be able to
create an individual object in the People-Centric User Interface.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide → Cross-Application Components → SAP
Product → Basic Settings → Register Applications for Set Type Generation(People-Centric UI).
Choose New Entries.CRMM_PRD_IOBJECT < > 01 ZF## 00 < > Version 0000
PRD_IO_01
CRMM_PRD_IOBJECT < > 01 ZF## 00 < > Version 0001
PRD_4ODP1
“<>” are blank entries.
Save the data.
1-1-7 Test your settings and create individual objects.
a. Change an installed base (category 01) in the SAP GUI with one component of
type Individual Object. Choose your newly created object family and anarbitrary object ID.
Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Installed Base → Change Installed Base.
Installed Base: < installed base from exercise 1-1-5>
Choose ENTER .
Choose the Individual Object tab.
Family: ZF##
Object I D: IO##1
Confirm with ENTER and mark the new installed base component in thestructure tree on the left.
Choose the Component Detail button.
Two fields (attributes) are visible: Printer Type and Paper Feed .
b. Create an individual object in the People-Centric UI. Choose your newly
created object family and an arbitrary object ID.
Choose Installed Bases → Individual Objects.
Choose Go To → List .
Choose New. Choose ## Object Family.
Object ID: IO##2
Base Category: ZC##
Choose the Printer tab and observe two fields (attributes).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 54/439
© SAP AG CR700 2-34
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 55/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-1
SAP AG 2004
Service Agreements and Service Contracts
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 56/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-2
SAP AG 2004
Service Agreements and Service Contracts
Service Agreements
Service Contracts
Service Level Agreements
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 57/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Identify functions and contents of service agreements and
service contracts
Create a new type of service contract in Customizing
Create a service contract
Describe the options for Service Level Agreements
Service Agreements and Service Contracts:Unit Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 58/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-4
SAP AG 2004
Service Agreements and Service Contracts:Business Scenario
Long-term agreements covering particular services are concluded with the customer.
The customer is invoiced regularly, based on the
terms of the agreement.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 59/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-5
SAP AG 2004
Service Agreements
Service Agreement:
A long-term outline agreement between business
partners (group contract)
Can contain products and price agreements but not
target values or target quantities
You can create a service agreement for a business
partner type
Service agreements:• New leading transaction category: Group Contract (BUS2000107)
• New transaction type OAS
• New item category OASP
List of service agreements available for a business partner in sales area data
• Assignment of a default service agreement is possible
You cannot exchange service agreements with the enterprise resource planning (ERP) system.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 60/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 61/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-7
SAP AG 2004
Service Contracts:
Represent long-term service agreements with
customers about content and coverage of services
Specify the service levels to which a customer is
entitled
List the parts that are covered by contracted
services (for example, server, workstations,
printers)
Include a product list containing services and
spare parts in contract entitlement
Contain price agreements for services and parts
Limit contracted services or spare parts in terms
of value and/or quantity
Service Contracts
A service contract is a long-term agreement with business partners that specifies which services are being offered for that period. The service contract line item lists customer objects – installed base,installed base components, and products – that are covered by the contract line item.
Service level agreements list the level of service to which a customer is entitled and contain functionsfor monitoring compliance with those terms. A contract may include contract-specific price agreementsthat control not only what is covered by the contract ,but also what prices may be charged for any workcovered by that contract.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 62/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-8
SAP AG 2004
Service Contract Structure
I t e m
D a t a
Service Product SLA
Object List
Product List Services
Spare PartsRelease List
Partner
Dates
Billing Plan
Billing
Prices & Conditions
Price Agreements H e a d e r D
a t a
Installed Base
Product
Cancellation
Texts
Status
Organization
Actions
Target Value /
Quantity
As with all other CRM documents, the service contract consists of header and item data. The servicecontract functions are controlled by the transaction type.
The header billing plan contains the totals for all item billing plans. In the billing due list, only item billing plans appear.
The services performed for the customer under service contract conditions are defined in the servicecontract item.
Objects can be installed bases, installed base components, or products.
Dates could be, for example, the validity period of the contract.
Different types of services can be stipulated as service products in a service contract item:
• An individual service (for example, hotline)
• A service package in which several services and spare parts are grouped in the product list (forexample, car inspection)
• A service limited according to value or quantity (for example, free-of-charge telephone consultationfor the first three months after buying software)
• A service plan in which planned services reoccurring at intervals are entered (for example,maintenance of a photocopier every three months)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 63/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 64/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 65/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-11
SAP AG 2004
Contract billing using CRM Billing:
Billing requests are generated from contract items
according to billing plan
Transferred to billing engine for billing
Document link between service order and
service contract allows:
Billing of service process with reference to service
contract’s pricing conditions
Service order cost settlement to service
contract's cost accounting object
Service Contract Billing
Service contract line items have a billing plan, which controls periodic billing.
Billing requests are generated from the billing plan according to its customizing, and are transferreddirectly to the billing engine.
Service processes assigned to service contracts may incur costs that are not entirely covered by thecontract. These services may be billed at a special rate based on conditions in price agreements in thecontract.
When the service order is billed, these conditions will apply automatically.
With mySAP CRM 2005, it is possible to use ERP Billing for CRM service contracts.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 66/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 67/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 68/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 69/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-15
SAP AG 2004
Standard SLA parameters delivered by SAP, allow
you to specify:
Time frame of service availability
Ensured first reaction time
Ensured call closure time
According to the Service window and Response
time profile fields provided by SAP within:
Service product master
Service contract item
Service Level Agreements (2)
Response time: How long it will take to respond to the customer need – for example, call back withinspecified time or technician on site within a specified time
Service window or Availability time: Working hours of the service or support center
Downtime: Maximum number of breakdowns per year
Availability: Percentage of assured system availability
Solution time: Maximum period of time allowed for the solution of a problem.
The SLA parameters Response Profile and Service Profile are delivered standard.
You can create additional parameters using customer-specific set types. Processing of the data from theset type occurs using Business Add-Ins (BAdIs).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 70/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-16
SAP AG 2004
Monday Tuesday
Service profile
8am -12pm / 1pm - 5pm
Response profile
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
7am - 7pm
8 hours
4 hours
2 hours
8am 12pm 6pm 8am 12pm 6pm time
Notification received
Availability Time and Response Time: Example
In this example, the response times determined are displayed for a call received on Monday at12 p.m.
Service profile: 8 a.m. – 12 p.m. / 1 p.m. – 5 p.m.
• Response time: 8 hours – response by Tuesday 12 p.m.
• Response time: 4 hours – response by Monday 5 p.m.
• Response time: 2 hours – response by Monday 3 p.m.
Service profile: 7 a.m. - 7 p.m.
• Response time: 8 hours – response by Tuesday 8 a.m.
• Response time: 4 hours – response by Monday 4 p.m.
• Response time: 2 hours – response by Monday 2 p.m.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 71/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 72/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 73/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 74/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 75/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-21
SAP AG 2004
Define transaction type:
Transaction attributes and characteristics:Controlling attributes
Leading business transaction category
Assign business transaction categories:
Additional business transaction categories
Dependent on leading business transaction category
Customizing at header level:
Different settings according to business
transaction category
Service Contract Customizing: Header
Standard delivered contract types: SC (service contract) and SCC (service contract [Value/Quantity])
The quantity/value service contracts has the entry C (Service: Target Value and Quantity) in theQuantity/Value Contract field in the details of the service contract.
If the standard transaction types are not adequate for the representation of your business processes, youcan define your own transaction types in Customizing by choosing Customer Relationship Management
→ Transactions → Basic Settings → Define Transaction Types. For each transaction type, you candefine the different attributes that are required for a business process.
Attached to transaction type:
• Text determination procedure
• Partner determination procedure
• Status profile
• Number range
• Increment item number and increment sub-item number
• Organizational data profile
• Early number assignment
Each transaction type is assigned to a business transaction category. Service contract is a businesstransaction category of its own.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 76/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 77/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 78/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-24
SAP AG 2004
Customizing Price Agreements
Price agreements are contract-specific conditions that
affect work done in service processes assigned to the
contract. Price-allowed condition types are
assigned to a group.
The group is assigned to item categories
and transaction types for contracts.
These same condition types must be used
in the pricing procedure of the service
process for the price agreements to
automatically apply.
Contractual price agreements take effect with billing from a service process with a contract reference.
The price agreements are considered if they belong to the contract header or contract line item to whichthe service process was assigned.
The same condition types used in the contract must be assigned to the pricing procedure for the service process.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 79/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-25
SAP AG 2004
Customizing SLA Escalation Management
Make settings in escalation management to control which
processes are triggered when deadlines are missed.
Assign the date profile to the
item category.
Assign the action profile to
the item category.
The system can monitor when dates that are defined in the SLA parameters are exceeded. This is done by making settings in escalation management. You can use escalation management to determine anydeadline you want to monitor and which subsequent processes you want to trigger when a date for thisdeadline is exceeded.
Assign the date profile SLA Data at Item Level to your service process item category in the activity Assign Date Profile to Item Category. Do the same thing for the action profile Monitoring SLADeadlines in the activity Assign Action Profile to the Item Category. Set up the selection report for performing the actions (transaction SPPFP) according to your requirements.
You can also enhance the action profile using your own action definitions. If you want to use your ownSmart Form as an output medium, enter the name of the Smart Form in Action Processing and define theschedule and start conditions for definition of the action.
Example
• You use the SLA parameter First Response Time. The first response time is exceeded in a service process. An e-mail is generated and sent automatically to remind the responsible employee aboutthis process and provide him or her with the most important transaction data.
• As an enhancement to this escalation, a second e-mail can be sent to the same person or to a different person after an additional period of time has expired.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 80/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-26
SAP AG 2004
You should now be able to:
Identify functions and contents of service agreements and
service contracts
Create a new type of service contract in Customizing
Create a service contract
Describe the options for Service Level Agreements
Service Agreements and Service Contracts:Unit Summary
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 81/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-27
Exercises
Unit: Service Agreements and Service Contracts
Topic: Service Agreements
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create service agreements
• Create service orders with a reference to a service agreement
Service agreements allow you to create long-term agreements that containinformation about prices and products for a particular customer or groupof customers. Information about pricing, discounts, billing and follow-up
actions can be maintained and inherited to contracts and service orders.
1-1 Create a service agreement and check for successful agreement determination.
1-1-1 Create a group contract of type Service Agreement for your customer,##Megastore, and enter the product SRV1_4 with a price agreement.
Check the organizational data and note the sales area.
1-1-2 Add a price agreement on item level for product SRV1_4. Choose condition type
ItemDiscContract (0PAR) and amount 20%.1-1-3 Release the item and save the service agreement.
1-1-4 Check the business partner master data and find the service agreement in thecorresponding sales area data.
1-1-5 Create a service order of type Service Process for your customer, ##Megastore,and enter service product SRV1_4 with quantity 1 AU.
Check for successful service agreement determination and check if the priceagreement on item level was applied.
1-1-6 Which setting in Customizing is relevant for service agreement determination?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 82/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-28
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 83/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 84/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 85/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 86/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-32
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 87/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 88/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-34
1-1-2 Add a price agreement on item level for product SRV1_4. Choose condition typeItemDiscContract (0PAR) and amount 20%.
SAP GUI
Choose Compress data areas .
Choose the Price Agreements tab.
Condition Type: 0PAR
Product ID: SRV1_4
Amount : 20
People-Centric UI
Choose the Products tab.
Choose the Prices tab.
Choose Add Entry.
Condition Type: ItemDiscContract Product ID: SRV1_4
Amount : 20
1-1-3 Release the item and save the service agreement.
SAP GUI
Choose Expand data areas .
Choose the General tab.
Choose the Release Items button.
Choose Save and write down the number: _______________
People-Centric UI
Choose the Service Status button and then choose the Release Items button (top of page).
Choose Save.
1-1-4 Check the business partner master data and find the service agreement in thecorresponding sales area data.
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu → Master Data → Business Partners → Maintain Business Partner .
Choose Open BP .
Use the F4 help and an appropriate search help (for example, Partner by address)to find and open the business partner with last name ##Megastore.
Display in BP role: Sold-To Party
Choose the Sales Area Data button.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 89/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-35
Choose the Choose Sales Area button.
Sales Organization: US Sales & Service
Distribution Channel : Service (14)
You should see the number of your group contract (service agreement) at the bottom of the page.
People-Centric UI
Choose Accounts → Accounts.
If necessary, choose Go To → List .
Choose Show Advance Search.
Search for your customer with last name ##Megastore.
Choose Go To → Details.
Choose the Interaction History tab.
You should see the number of your group contract (service agreement).
1-1-5 Create a service order of type Service Process for your customer, ##Megastore,and enter service product SRV1_4 with quantity 1 AU.
Check for successful service agreement determination and check if the priceagreement on item level was applied.
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu → Service → Maintain Service Processes.
Choose Business Transaction→ Create.
Choose Service Process → Service Process.
Description: ##AgreementDetermination
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Product : SRV1_4
Quantity: 1 AU
Choose ENTER .
A dialog box with the number of the service agreement is displayed.
Select the line with your group contract and confirm.
Choose the Item Details button.
Choose the Conditions tab.
The item discount was applied.
People-Centric UI
Choose Service Processing → Service Orders.
Choose New → Service Process.
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 90/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-36
Description: ##AgreementDetermination
In the Products area (or on the Products tab), choose Add Entry.
Product : SRV1_4
Quantity: 1 AU
Choose ENTER .
A dialog box with the number of the service agreement is displayed.
Select the line with your group contract and confirm.
Choose the Products tab.
Choose the Prices tab.
The item discount was applied.
1-1-6 Which setting in Customizing is relevant for service agreement determination?
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu → Architecture and Technology → Configuration →
Customizing .
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Transaction Types.
Find and select entry ZSE1 (Service Process) and choose Details .
In the SAP GUI, the transaction type of a serviceorder can be found on the Administration header
tab, but only if the customizing of the locallayout uses the option Show keys in alldropdown lists.
The parameter Agreement Determin. is set to F (Only at Item Level : Always
With Selection Option).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 91/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-37
SolutionsR-
Unit: Service Agreements and Service Contracts
Topic: Service Contracts
1-1 Create a new transaction type for service contracts and adapt it so that it meets yourrequirements. After completing the necessary Customizing steps, test your new transactiontype.
1-1-1 In Customizing, create a new transaction type, ZC## (##Service Contract), bycopying the standard entry SC.
Choose SAP Menu → Architecture and Technology→ Configuration→ Customizing .
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Transaction Types.
Find and select entry SC and choose Copy As… .
Transaction Type: ZC##
Description (short): ##Service Contract
Description (long): ## Service Contract
Inactive: <blank>
Choose ENTER and confirm the dialog box.
1-1-2 Assign organizational data profile ZIDES_05 to your newly created transactiontype.
Choose Details.
Org. Data Prof . ZIDES_05
Choose Back (F3).
1-1-3 Allow the transaction type to be used in channel CRM Server.
In the dialog structure, choose Allowed channels for transaction types.
Choose New Entries.
Choose CRM Server .
Save your settings and go back to the IMG.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 92/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 93/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 94/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-40
Choose the Availability Time icon next to the description.
Choose rule weekly periodic Availability Times.
Select the entries Mo-Sa and enter the hours (08:00 – 18:00) and time zoneMountain Time (Denver).
Choose Copy and save the data.
2-1-2 Create response profile ZRESPROF## (Response Profile ##) by copying theexisting profile BUSINESS with all dependent entries.
Which indicator is used to calculate the response times?
SAP GUI / People-Centric UI
In the dialog structure, choose Response Profile.
Select the response profile BUSINESS and choose Copy As….
Response Prof : ZRESPROF##
Description: Response Profile ##
Press ENTER and copy all dependent entries.
Save your settings and take a look at the response profile.
The response times Duration Until First Reaction (SRV_RF_DURA) and DurationUntil Service End (SRV_RR_DURA) are calculated depending on the priority ofthe service order.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 95/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-41
3-1 Test your settings and create a service contract of type ##Service Contract (ZC##).
3-1-1 SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu→ Service→ Service Contracts and Service Plans→ MaintainService Contracts.
Choose Business Transaction→ Create.
Choose Service Contract → ##Service Contract .
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Ext. Reference: Contract ##
People-Centric UI
Choose Service Cycle → Contracts → Service Contracts.
Choose New → ##Service Contract .
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Description: Contract ##
3-1-2 Enter the product SER_TOP with quantity 1. Confirm that in this case, itemcategory SCN is determined.
SAP GUI
Product : SER_TOP
Quantity: 1
People-Centric UI
Product : SER_TOP
Quantity: 1
3-1-3 In the item details, assign both the service profile and the response profile that youcreated in Exercise 2-1.
SAP GUI
Go to the item details (either expand the item details or double-click on the product).
Choose the Service Data tab.
Service Profile: ZSERPROF##
Response Prof.: ZRESPROF##
People-Centric UI
Choose the Products tab.
Choose the Service Data sub-tab.
Service Profile: ZSERPROF##
Response Prof.: ZRESPROF##
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 96/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-42
3-1-4 On item level, assign the installed base with external ID ##MEGASTORE to thiscontract.
SAP GUI
Choose the Object List tab.
Installed Base: <External ID ##MEGASTORE>
People-Centric UI
Choose the Reference Objects tab.
Choose Add Entry in the Installed Bases section.
Installed Base: <External ID ##MEGASTORE>
3-1-5 Maintain a price agreement with respect to a product group (0PAG). All spare
parts should get a discount of 25%.
SAP GUI
Choose the Price Agreements tab.
Choose condition type 0PAG.
Product Group (PGr): 02 (Spare parts)
Amount : 25
People-Centric UI
Choose Add Entry in the Price Agreements section.
Condition Type: ItemDiscContract
Product Group (PGr): 02
Amount : 25
3-1-6 Release the contract item, save the service contract, and write down the number.
SAP GUI
Expand the header data and choose the General tab.
Choose the Release Items tab.
Save the contract.
______________
People-Centric UI
Choose the Service Status buton and then choose the Release Items
button.Save the contract.
______________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 97/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-43
SolutionsR-
Unit: Service Agreements and Service Contracts
Topic: Service Contract Billing
1-1 Use CRM Billing to create a billing document for your service contract.
1-1-1 Maintain the billing due list, expand the line item with your contract number, andcreate a billing document only for the current (first) month.
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu→ Service→ Billing→ Maintain Billing Due List .
Document Number : <your contract number>
Choose Maintain.
Expand the item.
People-Centric UI
Choose Service Cycle → Billing → Billing Due List .
Choose Show Advanced Search.
Document Number : <your contract number>
Billing Date From: First day of next month
Choose Go.
Choose Go To → Details.
1-1-2 Which billing item category was determined? Why?
SAP GUI
Expand the entry.
Billing item category FAPF was determined.
In one of the above exercises you maintained billing item category determination
for your new service contract transaction type (ZC##) and the item category (SCN)therein. These settings have been applied here.
People-Centric UI
This information is not available.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 98/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 99/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-45
2-1 Use ERP Billing to create a billing document for another kind of service contract.
2-1-1 Create a service contract of type Contract ERP Billing (Z300) for your customer,##Megastore, and use product SER_021_ERP with quantity 1. Save the contractand write down the number.
_________________
SAP GUIChoose SAP Menu→ Service→ Service Contracts and Service Plans→ Maintain
Service Contracts.
Choose menu Business Transaction→ Create.
Choose Service Contract → Contract ERP Billing .
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Ext. Reference: Contract ERP Billing ##
Product : SER_021_ERP.
Choose Release Items.Choose Save.
People-Centric UI
Choose Service Cycle → Contracts → Service Contracts.
Choose New → ##Service Contract .
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Description: Contract ##
Product : SER_021_ERP
Quantity: 1
Choose Service Status → Release Items.
Choose Save.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 100/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-46
2-1-2 Open a second session. What kind of product is SER_021_ERP? Where was itcreated?
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu→ Master Data→ Products→ Maintain Products.
Choose Open Product….
Product ID: SER_021_ERP
Choose ENTER and go into change mode.
The product type is Material.
The main product category is MAT_DIEN (Service).
Since most of the fields are read only, the product was created in the ERP systemand transferred to CRM.
People-Centric UI
Choose Products → Products (Material).
Choose Show Advanced Search.
ID/Description: SER_021_ERP
Choose Go.
Choose Go To → Details.
The main product category is MAT_DIEN (Service).
Some data parts are not ready for input because the original system is different.
The product was created in the ERP system and transferred to CRM.
2-1-3 Take a look at the document flow of the service contract. What do you observe?
SAP GUI
Choose Document Flow ( ).
A replicated document of type Debit Memo Request was created in the ERPsystem.
People-Centric UI
Choose the Document Flow tab.
A replicated document of type Debit Memo Request was created in the ERPsystem.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 101/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-47
2-1-4 What is the origin of the pricing procedure and condition types used in the servicecontract?
SAP GUI
Choose the Header Overview tab.
The pricing procedure RVCXUS was determined.
Choose Architecture and Technology → Configuration → Customizing .
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
Choose SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Basic Functions→ Pricing→ Define Settings for Pricing→ Create Pricing Procedure.
Position your cursor on the entry RVCXUS.
The source of the pricing procedure (the same is true for the condition typestherein) is R/3.
2-1-5 Bill the service contract in the ERP back-end system.
Choose SAP Menu → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Display.
Order : <number of debit memo request>
Choose ENTER .
Choose Sales Document → Billing .
Save the billing document.
2-1-6 Display the document flow of the CRM contract.
Open the service contract and display the document flow. The ERP Billingdocument(s) are displayed.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 102/439
© SAP AG CR700 3-48
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 103/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-1
SAP AG 2004
Service Plans
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 104/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-2
SAP AG 2004
Service Plans
Service Plan Simulation
Service Plans
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 105/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the functions and contents of service plans
Create a service contract, including a service plan item
Simulate and forecast service plans
Service Plans: Unit Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 106/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-4
SAP AG 2004
Service Plans: Business Scenario
Your service organization would like to maintain
technical objects repeatedly and it should onlybe described once. With service plans it is also
possible to use time or counter-based interval
strategies.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 107/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-5
SAP AG 2004
Service Plans
WHEN? WHAT? WHERE?
Service planQuotation
Order
Activity
Scheduling
Type
Order
Template
Reference
Object
A service plan: Generates follow-ups (quotation, service order, activity) at definable
points in time
Uses a service strategy that is stored as master data; for a “simple”
case, a service interval can be used without having to maintain master
data
Determines when and which service is to be planned, performed, oroffered for which object; the rules therefore are defined in the service
interval
Can be set up so that a follow-up transaction is triggered before the
actual service plan is due
Follow-up documents are generated using a new action profile on sub-item level:• Temporal trigger
- Based on time interval (for example, every year)
- Fixed Interval – terminated by confirmation
• Performance-dependent trigger
- Based on counter readings (real counter based)
- Fixed counter interval with date forecast
• Event-dependent trigger
- Message or reporting of a failure
• Complex trigger- Combination of each of the above
Service orders are created from a service plan using the PPF (Post Processing Framework)
Three steps are carried out:
• Create a service order by copying the service plan item (copy control).
• Merge the new service order with additional data (for example, sub-items from a service order
template, reference objects, or dates).
• Update the service plan by calculating the next planned date.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 108/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-6
SAP AG 2004
Two Options for Planned Services
Service Contract (SC)
BP
SLA
Service Interval Template
Service Plan Type
Scheduling Type
Service Order
Template
Reference
Object
Service Plan (SRMP)
PLAN
SPMP
Service Interval Template
Service Plan Type
Scheduling Type
Service OrderTemplate
Reference
Object
PLAN
SPLA
Independent of Service Contract
Object-Related
Benefits of Planned Services:• Leads to a reduction of costs and an increase in efficiency through the standardization and effective
planning of (planned) services
• Prevents unplanned downtimes through regular maintenance
• Enables efficient planning of resources, for example, personnel and materials
• Takes into account legal requirements, for example, product liability laws and accident prevention
regulations
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 109/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-7
SAP AG 2004
Service Interval Template
Service Interval Template
Service Plan Type
Time-Based
Counter-Based
Time-Based and Counter-Based
Scheduling Type
Cyclical
Fixed Values
Once
Alternating
Service Order Template
Service interval templates are defined via SAP Menu→
Service→
Service Contracts and Service Plans→ Maintain Service Interval Templates.
Service order templates are service orders with special features.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 110/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 111/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-9
SAP AG 2004
Service plans and service intervals enable planning of services
in advance, based on time and/or counter values:
A recurring service should be performed
A service should be performed once or several times at a specified point in
time (not recurring)
A service should be performed based on a counter interval:
The planned date is evaluated on estimated counter consumption, which
is converted from the system into a duration added to the start date
The planned date is determined by estimated values; available
measuring vouchers continuously adapt the planned date to actual
consumption
Scheduling Scenarios
Inspection Inspection
cyclical planning
Time /
Counter
unique planning
Small
InspectionBig
InspectionSmall
Inspection
Big
Inspection
Time /
Counter
Scheduling, in this context, is defined as:
• A general rule about the frequency and the parameters of a planned service
The following scheduling scenarios are provided:
• Cyclic
• Once
• Alternating
• Fixed values
All scenarios can depend on:
• Time
• Counter
• Both time and counter:
- For example, “Mobility Service” for cars:
▪ Inspection every 15,000 km
▪ 20% rebate on time and material
▪ Mobility warranty for one year (breakdown service and so on)
- Questions to be answered within Planned Services:
▪ How many inspections will we have to perform next week/month/year?
▪ Do we have enough service technicians available?
▪ What about costs and revenues for mobility services?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 112/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-10
SAP AG 2004
Scheduling
Date rule for planned
date: for example,
with counter interval
Scheduling via special date rules:
Special date types in the date profile
Dynamic call of the date rule of the actual service interval bydate rule for planned date
Access to the service plan context within a date rule(for example, counters, reference objects, and so on)
The system calculates the planned dates (that is, the dates on which a service should be performed) forthe services defined in the service plan, such as quotations, activities, or service orders.
Using date rules, the release dates on which corresponding release objects (such as a service order or
contract quotation) are created in the system can be derived from the planned dates.
The planned date is calculated on the start of planning. This is, by default, the current date when the
service plan item is created because the date type Current Date is assigned by default to the date type
Planning Start in Customizing.
Planned dates can be determined for counter-based scheduling by means of a consumption prediction or
a calculated consumption value. For time-based scheduling, the planned date is calculated using the
service interval that was defined in the service plan.
Follow-up documents can be created even before the planned date. The date on which a follow-up
document is created before the planned date is defined by the date type Release Date.
You can use a defined lead time to determine the release date, that is, when a document is automatically
generated in the system and is visible to the service employee.
As soon as the document is generated in the system, the service employee can confirm and process the
document.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 113/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-11
SAP AG 2004
Creating a Service Order from a Service PlanSub-Item
Service Contract / Plan Service Order
Service order template
Check config.
Change RAM
Check config.
Change RAM
Item usage
Server Maintenance
Yearly inspection
Service plan item
Yearly inspectionService order item
Doc flow
Service contract item
Sub-item
A c t i o
n
A service plan item is a sub-item of the service contract item.
If a service order template has been assigned to the service interval template of the service plan product,the service order template items are copied in the service order item as sub-items.
Pricing of the service order item and sub-items can be influenced by the service contract item.
CO integration can be achieved by using the service contract item or service contract header as a
Controlling object.
The Post Processing Framework (PPF), which can be used either manually or automatically, allows
interaction of the dates and actions of the individual service plan items to be monitored, and also allows
the generation of follow-up documents.
A background job can be set up for automatic monitoring that checks, at regular intervals, if all the
scheduled actions comply with the start condition and, if necessary, generates the follow-up documents. The data from the service plan item is first copied to the item of the new business transaction in Service
during generation of the follow-up documents. Additional data, such as price agreements, can be
imported from the service contract. The planned dates in the service plan can then be recalculated, and
the service plan can be updated accordingly.
If more complex services are to be used on a planned date, you can predefine a business transaction
template in which the detailed services and their scope are entered, such as a service order template.
You can assign a business transaction template to a service interval either within a service interval
template, or in the contract during maintenance of a service plan item.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 114/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-12
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan Simulation
Forecast of future services
Forecast service events for a given time period, such as:
Planned dates
Organizational units involved
Resources needed
Pricing information
Give an idea how the next periods could look:
Resource workload:
– Demand for a specific resource cumulated within a period
Service workload:
– Number of services to be performed in a certain period
Support mid-term and long-term planning with forecast
Basic needs:
• Predict future resource workloads based on current service contracts
• Determine service event dates based on virtual service orders
• Transfer forecast data to SAP NetWeaver BI.
• Compare forecast and actual data.
Process:
• Enter parameters for forecast horizon.
• Select all service contracts with service plan within this horizon.
• System creates virtual service orders (which are not saved) to determine resources for each service
event date.
• View a list of dates and service orders containing the desired information (resources, products, dates,
and so on).
• Transfer data to BI.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 115/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-13
SAP AG 2004
Service Plan and Forecast
so
item 10
so
item 10
so
item 10
timeso next plan date
item 10
Service plan: Only the next planned date
Forecast: Series of next planned datesParameters:
• Forecast horizon: t1 – t2 or
• Next two orders
t1 t2
Order1 Order2
time
Service plan simulation can be executed by choosing SAP Menu→
Service→
Service Contracts andService Plans → Simulate Service Plans.
During the simulation, virtual service orders are created using existing service plans. This takes into
account the date rules that exist in the service plans. These virtual service orders are displayed in the list
along with additional information, such as information about the required resources and products.
The virtual service orders cannot be stored in mySAP CRM, but they can be read and used by the
company. You can quickly gather information about the expected workloads for a period in the future.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 116/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-14
SAP AG 2004
Forecasting: Process Steps in mySAP CRM
Select service
transaction andsimulation period
Maintain simulation
parameters for result list
Simulate service orders on
header and item level
Trigger transferof results to BI
1
2
34
If necessary, you can send the data forecast during the simulation to BI to perform further, more detailedanalyses, or to compare current and planned service data. SAP supplies predefined queries for analyzing
the simulated data in BI.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 117/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-15
SAP AG 2004
You should now be able to:
Describe the functions and contents of service plans
Create a service contract, including a service plan item
Simulate and forecast service plans
Service Plans: Unit Summary
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 118/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-16
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 119/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-17
Exercises
Unit: Service Plans
Topic: Planned Services
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Explain the concept of service plans
• Create a service contract with a service plan item
• Simulate a service plan
Service plans help you to save costs incurred through unforeseendowntimes and increase efficiency, for example, through improved and
more comprehensible planning and more efficient scheduling ofresources, such as employees or materials.
1-1 Examine a special service plan product that will later be used in a service contract (such as
a service plan item).
1-1-1 Find and open the product master SPL_SERVER.
1-1-2 Which item category group is assigned to the product?
1-1-3 Which interval template is assigned to the service plan?
1-2 Examine the assigned service interval template.
1-2-1 Which plan type is used?
1-2-2 Which scheduling type is used?
1-2-3 How frequently are service orders being generated?
1-2-4 Which transaction template is assigned?
1-3 Take a look at the transaction template.
1-3-1 Which products are assigned to the service order template?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 120/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 121/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-19
SolutionsR-
Unit: Service Plans
Topic: Service Plans
1-1 Examine a special service plan product that will later be used in a service contract (such as
a service plan item).
1-1-1 Find and open the product master SPL_SERVER.
SAP GUI
SAP Menu Master Data Products Maintain Products
Choose Open product ( ).
Product ID: SPL_SERVER.
Choose Continue ( ).
People-Centric UI
Choose Accounts and Products → Products → Products.
Choose Show Advanced Search.
ID/Description: SPL_SERVER .
Choose Go.
1-1-2 Which item category group is assigned to the product?
SAP GUI
Choose the Service tab.
The item category group is SPLA.
People-Centric UI
Choose Go To → Details.
The item category group is SPLA.1-1-3 Which interval template is assigned to the service plan?
SAP GUI
Interval template IDES_HT_1 is assigned.
People-Centric UI
This information might not available in the standard People-Centric UI of this system.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 122/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 123/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-21
People-Centric UI
Choose Accounts and Products → Templates → Service Order Templates.
Choose Show Advanced Search.
Transaction ID: 200250
Choose Go.
Select the right item and choose Go To → Details.
Three products are assigned to the service order template: SRV1_4, R-1130, and
R-1160.
2-1 Create a service contract with a service plan item.
2-1-1 Create a service contract of type Service Contract and enter the following data:
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
External Reference: ##Service Plan
Add product SER_022 with quantity 1 and – as a sub-item – the product
SPL_SERVER , also with quantity 1.
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu→ Service→ Service Contracts and Service Plans→ Maintain
Service Contracts.
Choose Business Transaction→ Create.
Choose Service Contract→ Service Contract .
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Ext. Reference: ##Service Plan
Product : SER_022
Quantity: 1
Choose ENTER .
Higher-Level Item: 100
Product : SPL_SERVER
Quantity: 1
People-Centric UI
Choose Service Cycle → Contracts → Service Contracts.
Choose New→ ##Service Contract .
Sold-to party: ##Megastore
Description: ##Service Plan
Choose the Products tab.
Choose Add Entry.
Product : SER_022
Quantity: 1
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 124/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-22
Choose ENTER .
Choose Add Entry.
Higher-Level Item: 100
Product : SPL_SERVER
Quantity: 1
2-1-2 Which item category was determined for the service plan product?
SAP GUI
Item category: SPLA.
People-Centric UI
Item category: SPLA.
2-1-3 Check the service plan data on item level.
SAP GUI
Choose Compress data areas.
If necessary, choose the Service Data tab of your service plan item.
You should see the service plan data that you examined in the first exercise.
People-Centric UI
Choose the Service Plan tab.
You should see the service plan data that you examined in the first exercise.
2-1-4 Is an action scheduled for the service plan item?
SAP GUI
Choose the Actions tab.No, there is no action scheduled yet.
People-Centric UI
Choose the Schedule Actions button.
No, there is no action scheduled yet.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 125/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 126/439
© SAP AG CR700 4-24
3-1 Perform simulation of service plans.
3-1-1 Start the service plan simulation and simulate service orders for your service
contract.
Use appropriate selection parameters (transaction type ZSE1; Simulation of Next
12 Months)
SAP GUI
Choose SAP Menu → Service → Service Contracts and Service Plans → SimulateService Plans.
Choose Get Variant .
Variant Name: ZT_CR700
Confirm the variant.
Transaction Number : <your contract number>
Choose Execute.
People-Centric UI
Choose Analytics → Service Planning and Forecasting → Forecasting .
Choose Show Advanced Search.
Transaction ID: <your contract number>
Choose Go.
Select your contract and choose Go To → Details.
Choose the Change Parameter button.
Transaction Type: ZSE1
Simulation Date To: one year from today
Press ENTER .
Close the window.
3-1-2 How many service orders do you expect to be simulated?
Since the simulation parameter is set to Simulation of Next 12 Months and the
service interval template uses interval every three months, three service ordersshould be simulated. The action you executed in one of the prior exercises already
triggered the first service order.
3-1-3 Select the line with your service contract and choose the Simulation button.
Can you explain the outcome?
SAP GUI
Select the line item and choose Simulate Service Order .
People-Centric UI
Choose Simulation → Header View.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 127/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-1
SAP AG 2004
Usage-Based Service Contracts
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 128/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-2
SAP AG 2004
Usage-Based Service Contracts: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of usage-based service contracts
Create and work with a usage-based service contract
Describe single pool contracts and aggregate contracts
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 129/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 130/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 131/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-5
SAP AG 2004
Usage-Based Service Contracts Life Cycle
Customer
Life cycle
AssetAccounting
Payables
Classi-ficationRevenue
Recognition
GeneralLedger
Service-Contract
Quotation
ServiceContract
ContractChanges
ContractEnd
UsageCapturing
VolumeDetermination
Billing
Periodic
Billing
Accounting
Life cycle
Business
Partner
Installed
Base
Service
Product
Physical
Product
Counters
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 132/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-6
SAP AG 2004
Usage-Based Billing (UBB) Service Contracts
UBB Contract
Business
Partner
Physical
Product
UBB Service
Product
Billing Plan
Credit Overview
Minimum charge,
Miss volume,
Correction volume/amount
UBB Control DataPricing, volume doc,
billing control,
pool linkage,
billing holidays
Pricing
Flat rate
Quarterlyin arrear
Monthlyin front
Yearly
in arrear
Usage
Pool
distribution
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q
Business
Partner Master
Product
Master (UBB Service)
Product
Master (Physical)
Business Partner
A Usage-Based Billing (UBB) service contract is based on the standard mySAP CRM service contract,including usage data.
UBB service contracts contain up to three billing plans: Service (flat rate), consumption (usage), and
pool redistribution.
Linkage to higher level (pool) contracts is possible. This allows pool redistribution.
Several change processes are supported with UBB service contracts.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 133/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-7
SAP AG 2004
Counters
Counters are entities (master data) that enable
usage to be captured
Attributes for example:
Minimum and maximum value
Overflow value (e.g., 999,999 for a car odometer)
Average value per time
Usage function for controlling the usage
capturing process
Examples:
Odometer in a car Counter on a copier
Meter resets
Counters can be maintained by choosing SAP Menu
→
Master Data→
Counter→
Maintain Counter. Counters are linked to installed base components, individual objects, and products via relationships.
When you define a counter, you define application-specific characteristics, such as the usage function,
in addition to general attributes such as unit of measure and counter overflow. The usage function is
required to assign the condition types in pricing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 134/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-8
SAP AG 2004
Readings
Readings capture a counter reading or a counter difference value
Readings are used to audit the trail of
the wear and tear of an object
the consumption of goods or services
the reduction of an object’s useful life
Reading process:
automatically via an interface(e.g. optical document readers)
manually
Volumes that are not part of the volume determination
aremaintainable with reason code. Example: Volume used by service technician to test the product
after service
Entering Readings:• SAP Menu → Service → Usage-Based Billing → Readings → Enter Readings
• Readings can also be maintained directly in the service contract.
Reading Checks:
• Validation against past readings and average value of counter.
• BAdI CRM_UBB_VOL_I_BADI for implementation of user-specific validations
• Handling of erroneous readings by an error worklist. SAP Menu → Service → Usage-Based Billing
→ Readings → Correct Readings from Error Worklist
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 135/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-9
SAP AG 2004
Billing Plans
Service
(Monthly in front)
Usage
(Quarterly in arrear)
Inclusive
(Yearly In front)
Invoice Date
SepJulFeb JanDecNovOctAugJunMayApr Mar Jan
1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q
Service - typically monthly (advanced payment)
Usage - typically quarterly
Inclusive- typically annual
A billing plan reflects the time schedules (periodicity) for billing
The billing plan enables you to bill for a product or service, independently of a delivery. You can either bill the same amount at regular intervals (periodic billing plan) or bill different amounts at specified
dates that have been pre-defined (milestone billing plan).
The billing plan is a detailed billing schedule that can either be valid for all the items in the business
transaction, or for each item in the business transaction.
In order to use Billing Plan Functionality, Billing Plan Types have to be defined and assigned in
Customizing
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Basic
Settings → Billing Plan → Define Billing Plan Types
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Basic
Settings→
Billing Plan→
Assign Billing Plan Type to Business Transaction Type• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Basic
Settings → Billing Plan → Define Billing Plan Types → Assign Billing Plan Type to Item Category
• Standard Billing Plan Types for UBB are: 60-64.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 136/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-10
SAP AG 2004
Volume and Credit Overview
Volume Overview
One Volume Overview per UBB Service Contract Item
Billable Gross Volume determined through
Readings or
Estimation
Credit Overview
Storage of all relevant values from the billing and usage capture
Storage of mistaken volumes to reduce the billable volume if needed.
Prepaid volumes from the flat rate (e.g. inclusive volume, service), are transferred
from pre-billing process for consideration in the appropriate usage billing
Maintenance of manual volumes or amounts in the credit overview (e.g. for
correction of wrong past billing results in order to avoid reversing of billing
documents)
Volume Overview:• The system updates the volume overview by reading the counter values regularly. The system checks
whether a reading is relevant for billing and, if so, assigns it to an entry in the volume overview.
• You can use Business Add-In (BAdI) Check Usage of Readings in Volume Overview to implement
tests that the system performs when a new reading is received or the system has to determine the best
reading for a billing period. This BAdI is located in Customizing for Customer Relationship
Management under Usage-Based Billing (UBB) → Usage Recording → Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) →
BAdI: Check Usage of Readings in Volume Overview.
• If you have not entered a reading for a billing period yet, the reading and usage fields are blank. Youcan enter values manually. If you enter a relevant reading for this entry, the reading then overwrites
your manual entries.
• If no reading has taken place by a defined time, you can also use the UBB service contract to send a
reading reminder
Credit Overview:
• This function is used to update credit volumes and values. It also documents the usage of credit
volumes and saves the prebilled volumes and values for the next usage billing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 137/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-11
SAP AG 2004
Pool Contract Types & Pool Contract Linkage
Create Pool Link
Change Pool Link
Cancel Pool LinkSingle
Pool
Contract
AggregateContractAggregate
Contract
Single
ContractSingle
ContractSingle
Contract
Single Pool
Contract
Aggregate
Contract
Linkage
Two types of
Pool Contracts
Creation of a Pool Link:• Linkage to a Single Pool or Aggregate Contract is triggered though an action from within the UBB
Service Contract.
• Time dependant link between single and pool contracts. Pool contract billing considers links.
automatically. Time rule based linkage in case of unknown start.
Changing of a Pool Link
• Can change starting date of linkage. No change in pool periods already billed.
Termination of Pool Link
• Link can be terminated manually at a chosen date
- aggregate contracts: usage is billed again by single contract- restriction: no termination in periods that have been billed already
• Link is terminated automatically at end of single contract and/or end of pool contract
- at end of pool contract all links to single contracts are terminated
Rule-Based Pool Link
• Automatic activation of a pool link depending on a date rule (e.g. contract start date) during
inception of the contract
• Restriction: Only possible for non-incepted contracts
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 138/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-12
SAP AG 2004
Single Pool Contract
Single Pool Contract
Recalculates the usage and the commitment of all linkedsingle contracts
Recalculation period is maintained on single pool contract
and independent of the usage or flat periods on single
contracts
Difference between usage and commitment volume is
calculated and refundable (if greater than 0) through single
pool contract billing (Pool Distribution)
Single Pool Contract: A single pool contract recalculates the usage values of the assigned singlecontracts. As a result, your customers can be granted a credit. If the prebilled volume for certain single
contracts is exceeded, but the prebilled volume for other contracts is not reached, the system creates a
credit. Usage is calculated separately for each assigned contract. Each contract can have different usage
volumes, a different usage per period, and a different price per object (per copy, for example). If pool
calculation results in a deduction volume, the system redistributes this volume to the single contracts in
order to reflect the correct values
Billing Process of a Single Pool Contract
• Inception of contract fixes Service BRI with inclusive volume and Usage BRI with estimation for
single contract
• Revenue Recognition Service and Usage for single contract
• Billing of Service with inclusive for single contracts
• Re-Pricing Usage BRI for single contract from volume overview after release based on usage price
of single contract
• New Revenue Recognition Usage BRI for single contract
• Billing of Usage for single contracts
• Pre-Billing of Single Pool contract with update of Pool distribution BRI in single contract if pool
requirement fulfilled (e.g. enough volume?)
• Revenue Recognition Pool distribution for single contract
• Billing of Pool with tax and controlling based on single contract data
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 139/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-13
SAP AG 2004
Aggregate Pool Contract
Aggregate Pool Contract
Bills the usage of all linked single contracts
In the single contracts billing of usage is deactivated during
the pool linkage (not pre-billing)
The periods of the aggregate contract are independent of the
periods in the single contracts
Difference between usage and commitment volume is
calculated and refundable (if greater than 0) through
aggregate pool contract billing (Pool Distribution)
Aggregate Pool Contract: An aggregate contract is used to bill usage in all the single contracts linked
with that aggregate contract. When single contracts are linked with an aggregate contract, usage is not
billed separately for the single contracts. Instead, the system calculates the defined usage volumes and
the actual usage volumes for all the linked single contracts. Any prices defined in single contracts are
ignored. Instead, the usage price defined for the aggregate contract is always used. As a result, you have
to define a usage price for each usage function in the aggregate contract (as a price agreement or
condition master record). If you do not define this price, the aggregate calculation will be incorrect. The
system bills the difference between the actual usage volume and the agreed volume. If pool calculation
results in a deduction volume, the system redistributes this volume to the single contracts in order to
reflect the correct values.
Billing Process of an Aggregate Contract
• Inception of contract fixes Service BRI with inclusive volume and Usage BRI with estimation for
single contract
• Revenue Recognition Service and Usage for single contract
• Billing of Service with inclusive for single contracts
• Re-Pricing Usage BRI for single contract from volume overview after release based on usage price in
aggregate pool
• New Revenue Recognition Usage BRI for single contract
• Pre-Billing of Aggregate Pool with update of Pool Distribution BRI in single contract if pool
requirement fulfilled (e.g. enough volume?)
• Revenue Recognition Pool distribution for single contract
• Billing of Pool with tax and controlling based on single contract data
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 140/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-14
SAP AG 2004
Example – UBB Service Contract
UBB Service Contract (USC)
Material: Copier (HT-1085) (UOBJ) Service: SRV_USAGE_COPIER (USCN)
Counter (A3) Counter (A4) Contract Class Usage Function Group
ActionsBP
Object List Billing Plan Billing Plan Item
Counter/Readings Credit Overview Volume Overview
Actions
Ind. Object Service
ConsumptionPool Redistribution
Counter from
Ind. Object
Inception
The slide above shows a schematic UBB service contract.
The UBB Service Contract contains on line item with two products, one Material (physical product) andone Service. This is in principle the same as creating a line item with a service product and a sub-item
with a material.
The UBB Service Contract Header contains several actions, e.g. the Inception (Activation) action as
well as actions that trigger service contract change processes.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 141/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 142/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-16
SAP AG 2004
Calculation Example: Single Pool Contract
Volume Based
Single Pool
Period 1 01/01/2003 - 03/31/2003
Cumulation of volumes and values
Total overage: 30,000 copies
Total unused vol: 20,000 copies
Total billed value: 625.00 EUR
,
UBB SC 3Usage Period 1
UBB SC 1
Usage Period 1
UBB SC 2
Usage Period 1
Assignment
Pool calculation
Refund Vol = min(Overage,Unused)
= 20,000
.
Refund Val = EUR
= 416,67 EUR
625000,30
000,20∗
EUR0
EUR EUR 22,34767,41630000
25000−=∗−
EUR EUR 44,6967,41630000
5000−=∗−
Pool Distribution
Gross volume 55,000 copiesPrepaid volume -30,000 copies
Net volume 25,000 copies
Net price 0,02 x 25,000 = 500.00 EUR
Usage Invoices
Gross volume 20,000 copies
Prepaid volume -15,000 copies
Net volume 5,000 copies
Net price 0,025 x 5,000 = 125.00 EUR
Gross volume 15,000 copiesPrepaid volume -35,000 copies
Net volume -20,000 copies
Net price 0,025 x 0 = 0.00 EUR
In the slide above an example of a Single Pool Contract with pool distribution to three UBB Service
Contracts is shown.
• The accumulation of usage (copies) of all three contracts leads to a value of 625,00 EUR = (500,00 +
125,00 + 0) EUR.
• Due to the negative net volume of the Usage Period of UBB SC 3, Pool Distribution leads to a
corrected amount for the first two Contracts.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 143/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-17
SAP AG 2004
Calculation Example: Aggregate Pool Contract
EUR0
EUR EUR 250500000,50
000,25−=∗−
EUR EUR 250500000,50
000,25−=∗−
Aggregate Pool
Period 1 01/01/2003 - 03/31/2003
Price per copy: 0.025 USD
300 USD
30,000 copies included
500 USD
40,000 copies included
100 USD
10,000 copies included
Invoices
UBB SC1 (Service)
Per. 1 01/01 - 03/31/2003
UBB SC 2 (Service)
Per. 1 01/01 - 03/31/2003
UBB SC 3 (Rental)
Per. 1 01/01 - 03/31/2003
Assignment
Pool DistributionRefund Val = EUR
= 500 EUR
Pool calculation
Refund Vol = min(Overage,Unused)
= 20,000
.
1250000,50
000,20∗
Pre-Billing SC‘s
,SC 1: 55,000 copies
30,000 copies25,000 copies
SC 2: 20,000 copies
40,000 copies
-20,000 copies
SC 3: 35,000 copies
10,000 copies
25,000 copies
Net price 0.025 x 25,000 = 625 EUR
Net price 0.025 x 0 = 0 EUR
Net price 0.025 x 25,000 = 625 EUR
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 144/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-18
SAP AG 2004
Contract Change Management
Stop
Undo Stop
Location
Ownership
Partner
Termination
Continuation
Buy Out (Purchase)
Billing
Accounting
Change
of
End
Processes
Physical Product
Settlement
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 145/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-19
SAP AG 2004
Usage-Based Service Contracts: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Explain the concept of usage-based service contracts
Create and work with a usage-based service contract
Describe single pool contracts and aggregate contracts
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 146/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-20
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 147/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-21
Exercises
Unit: Usage-Based Service Contracts
Topic: Usage-Based Service Contracts
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Understand the concept of Usage-Based Service Contracts
• Create and process a Usage-Based service contract includingnecessary master data, readings and billing.
Usage-Based Service Contracts allow you to bill the customer based on
consumption (usage). Optionally it is possible to use Pool Contracts.In the following UBB (Usage-Based Billing) will used as a abbreviationfor Usage-Based Service Contracts.
• For this exercise please use SAP
GUI.
• It is possible to process the UBB
scenario using People-Centric UI
(the standard role Service Managercontains the necessary content) but
for specific parts of the exercisesSAP GUI is beneficial
1-1 Analyze master data that will be relevant in the Usage-Based Service Contracts scenario.
1-1-1 Check the service specific data of service product: SRV_USAGE_COPIER .
Which product category is assigned to the product?
Which item category group is assigned to the product?
What are the values for Contract Class and Usage Function Group?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 148/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-22
1-1-2 Have a look at product HT-1085 and the UBB specific conditions that have been
maintained for this product.
Open the product master data for HT-1085 and check which counters are linkedto this product?
Counter: _______
Counter: _______Go to the condition maintenance and select all conditions for product HT-1085.
Which condition types and values do you find?
Condition Type: ___________ Value/Unit: _____________
Condition Type: ___________ Value/Unit: _____________
Condition Type: ___________ Value/Unit: _____________
Condition Type: ___________ Value/Unit: _____________
Condition Type: ___________ Value/Unit: _____________
Condition Type: ___________ Value/Unit: _____________1-1-3 Go to the counter administration and open both counters. Note the Counter Category,
Usage Function and the Planned Counter Value of both counters.
Counter Category (Counter 1): _________
Usage Function (Counter 1): _________
Planned Time & Unit (Counter 1): _________
-----------------------------------------------------------
Counter Category (Counter 2): _________
Usage Function (Counter 2): _________Planned Time & Unit (Counter 2): _________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 149/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-23
1-2 Create a Usage-Based Service Contract and initialize (incept) it.
1-2-1 Create a service contract of type UBB Service Contract for your customer
##Megastore. Enter product: HT-1085 and in the same line Service Product:SRV_USAGE_COPIER.
Go to the item details tab Object List and in the field Object ID add the individual
object CM##01.
Take a look at the tab Billing Plan on item level.
Can you derive the value of USD 250 per month for Service?
Do you see any consumption values?
Take a look at the Billing Plan Item tab (on item level). Choose tab Conditions.
Release the item, save the contract and note the number.
_________________
1-2-2 Use the Action Monitor in order to do an inception of the contract. Fill the Application
Key field with <* contract number> to only select actions relevant for your contract.
Analyze the effects of the inception.
a) Open the individual object and check the individual object relationships.
b) Open the UBB contract and check the Billing Plan on item level. Do you see
consumption values and can you derive them?
1-3 The copy machine was installed and the first consumption period is over. Readings have to be entered.
1-3-1 First do the initialization reading. On 01.03.2003 a service employee (origin 1) installs
the copier (reading transaction type 01) with counter readings 0 (zero) Quantity for bothcounters (A3 and A4). Use description Reading ##-1.
1-3-2 Next enter the first quarters reading. On 31.03.2003 the customer (origin 2) reportsconsumption (reading transaction type 03): 4000 copies A3 and 3500 copies A4 have
been made. Use description Reading ##-2.
1-3-3 Display the effects of the readings by looking at the (conditions) values on the Billing
Plan and Billing Plan Item tab.
What is the billing value for consumption in the first quarter of 2003?
Can you derive the value?
1-3-4 Use CRM Billing to bill the usage-based reading part of the contract (consumption offirst quarter).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 150/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-24
2-1 Working with a Single Pool Contract.
2-1-1 Create another UBB Service Contract with the individual object CM## 02 and other
than that, the same values as the first contract
Release the contract and save it.
Incept the contract.
Enter the readings of:
01.01.2003: 0 for A4 and A3.
31.03.2003: 2000 on A4 and 2500 on A3.
Create the billing document for this document as well for the usage period as you did forthe above contract.
2-1-2 Create a pool contract of type UBB Single Pool Con. for your customer ##Megastore.
Enter product SER_POOL with quantity 1.
Go to the item tab Billing Plan. Do you see any billing values?
Save the contract and note the number. ___________________
2-1-3 Link the two previously created contracts to the pool contract. Therefore open each UBBservice contract in change mode and execute action UBB: Assignment to a Pool
Contract. Choose 01.01.2003 as valid from date.
2-1-4 Take a look at the pool contract after the links have been made. Can you see the linkage
from the pool contract once the linkage is done?
Release the pool contract item.
2-1-5 Prebill the first quarter (01.01.2003 – 31.03.2003) of the pool contract.
• SAP Menu Service Usage-
Based Billing Prebilling
Pool Prebilling
2-1-6 Go back to the pool contract. Can you see a billing plan? Can you see the conditionsused?
2-1-7 Do billing of the pool contract. Do you bill a credit or a debit?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 151/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-25
SolutionsR-
Unit: Usage Based Service Contracts
Topic: Usage Based Service Contracts
1-1 Analyze master data that will be relevant in the Usage-Based Service Contracts scenario.
1-1-1 Check the service specific data of service product: SRV_USAGE_COPIER .
Which product category is assigned to the product?
Which item category group is assigned to the product?
What are the values for Contract Class and Usage Function Group?
SAP Menu Master Data Products Maintain Products
Choose Open product ( )
Product ID: SRV_USAGE_COPIER.
Product Category: SRV_UBB1
Choose tab Service.
Item category group: SRVP
Contract Class: 10 (Service)
Usage Function Group: 001 (Copier)
1-1-2 Have a look at product HT-1085 and the UBB specific conditions that have been
maintained for this product.
Open the product master data for HT-1085 and check which counters are linked
to this product?
Open Product ( ) HT-1085.
Choose the button Relationships and tab Counter .
Counter: 151 (A4)
Counter: 152 (A3)
Go to the condition maintenance and select all conditions for product HT-1085.
Which condition types and values do you find?
SAP Menu Master Data Prices and Conditions Maintain Conditions
Application: CRM
MaintenanceGrp: UBB_GCM
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 152/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-26
In the fields tree mark Product ID.
Choose Select Records ( ).
Product ID: HT-1085
Choose Execute.
Condition Type: 2201 Value/Unit: USD 0,02 / COP
Condition Type: 2202 Value/Unit: USD 0,03 / COP
Condition Type: 2231 Value/Unit: USD 100 / Month
Condition Type: 2232 Value/Unit: USD 150 / Month
Condition Type: 2321 Value/Unit: 1000 COP
Condition Type: 2322 Value/Unit: 500 COP
1-1-3 Go to the counter administration and open both counters. Note the Counter Category,
Usage Function and the Planned Counter Value of both counters.
SAP Menu Master Data Counter Maintain Counter
Choose Counter Administration.
Choose Open ( ).
Counter ID: 151
Counter Category (Counter 1): 002
Usage Function (Counter 1): 0BW4
Planned Time & Unit (Counter 1): 6.450 / 1 month
Choose Open ( ).
Counter ID: 152
Counter Category (Counter 2): 002
Usage Function (Counter 2): 0BW3
Planned Time & Unit (Counter 2): 350 / 1 month
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 153/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-27
1-2 Create a Usage-Based Service Contract and initialize (incept) it.
1-2-1 Create a contract of transaction type UBB Service Contract using these values:
SAP Menu Service Service Contracts and Service Plans Maintain
Service Contracts
Create a new service contract of type UBB Service Contract.
Sold-To Party: ##Megastore
Product: HT-1085 Service Product: SRV_USAGE_COPIER (on the same row!)
Expand the item details and choose tab Object List .
Object ID: CM## 01
Take a look at the tab Billing Plan Item (on item level).
Can you derive the value of USD 250 per month for Service?
The value can be derived from the condition values for condition types 2231 and
2232 (USD 100 + USD 150) which represent a monthly fee for the copier.
Do you see any consumption values?
No, there are no consumption values.
Choose tab Billing Plan Item. Choose tab Conditions.
Here you can see the condition types 2231 and 2232 and the corresponding values.
Expand the header data and choose tab General .
Choose the button Release Items.
Save the contract and note the number.
__________________
1-2-2 Use the Action Monitor in order to do an inception of the contract. Fill the Application
Key field with <* contract number> to only select actions relevant for your contract.
SAP Menu Service Action Monitor
Application Key: <*contract number>
Choose Execute.
Mark the action UBB: HEADER INCEPTION and choose Execute.
Analyze the effects of the inception.
a) Open the individual object and check the relationships.
SAP Menu Master Data Installed Base Display Installed Base
Enter your installed base number from the first exercise.
In the structure tree on the left mark the individual object you assigned to the
contract.
Choose the button Relationships..
Choose the button Ind.ObjecRelationships.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 154/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-28
Choose tab Counter .
Two counters from the product are now on the individual object.
b) Open the UBB contract and check the Billing Plan on item level. Do you seeconsumption values and can you derive them?
SAP Menu Service Service Contracts and Service Plans Maintain
Service Contracts Choose Open, enter your contract number and confirm.
Choose item tab Billing Plan.
Choose tab Consumption.
Do you see any consumption values?
Yes, there are consumption values, USD 327 per quarter.
Choose tab Billing Plan Item. Choose tab Conditions.
From the dropdown list choose a Consumption item.
Counter A4 A3
Plan value ( 6450 COP / month 350 COP / month
Period 3 months 3 months
Sum of copies 19350 COP 1050 COP
Prebilled copies (2321/22) 3000 1500
(Sum – Prebilled) copies 16350 - 450
Price / COP (2201/02) USD 0,02 / COP USD 0,03 / COP
Sum USD 327 0
Click on the Status tab on item level (not on the Billing Plan Item level where
you are at the moment!) and notice that the status is set to UBB Contract.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 155/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-29
1-3 The copy machine was installed and the first consumption period is over. Readings have to
be entered.
1-3-1 First do the initialization reading. On 01.03.2003 a service employee (origin 1) installsthe copier (reading transaction type 01) with counter readings 0 (zero) Quantity for both
counters (A3 and A4). Use description Reading ##-01.
SAP Menu Service Usage-Based Billing Usage-Based Billing Enter
Readings
Business Transaction/Item: <<Your contract number>>
Click Open ( ).
Reading Valid As Of: 01.01.2003
Origin: 1 (Service Technician)
TrnsactnType: 01 (Installation)
Description: Reading ##-01
Click on ( Display Readings for All Count )
Counter Reading A3: 0
Counter Reading A4: 0
Choose ENTER.
1-3-2 Next enter the first quarters reading. On 31.03.2003 the customer (origin 2) reports
consumption (reading transaction type 03): 4000 copies A3 and 3500 copies A4 have
been made. Use description Reading ##-2.
Reading Valid As Of: 31.03.2003
Origin: 2 (Customer)
TrnsactnType: 03 (Consumption)
Description: Reading ##-02
Click on ( Display Readings for All Count )
Counter Reading A3: 4000
Counter Reading A4: 3500
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 156/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-30
1-3-3 Display the effects of the readings by looking at the (conditions) values on the Billing
Plan and Billing Plan Item tab.
SAP Menu Service Service Contracts and Service Plans Maintain
Service Contracts
Choose Open, enter your contract number and confirm.
Choose item tab Billing Plan.
Choose tab Consumption.
Do you see any consumption values?
What is the billing value for consumption in the first quarter of 2003?
Consumption value USD 85 in the first quarter.
Can you derive the value?
Choose tab Billing Plan Item. Choose tab Conditions.
From the dropdown list choose Consumption item 01.01.2003-31.03.2003 .
Counter A4 A3
Volume (Consumption
reading)3500 COP 4000 COP
Prebilled copies (2321/22) 3000 1500
(Volume– Prebilled) copies 500 2500
Price / COP (2201/02) USD 0,02 / COP USD 0,03 / COP
Price USD 10 USD 75
1-3-4 Use CRM Billing to bill the usage-based reading part of the contract (consumption of
first quarter).
SAP Menu Service Billing Maintain Billing Due List
Document Number: <your contract number>
Choose Execute.
Expand ( ) your contract item.
Mark the list item with the billing item category UFPU (and value USD 85) and
select Individual Billing ( ).
Choose Save.
Optional:
Go back to the contract. On the item level choose Billing Plan Item.
From the drop down list choose the Consumption item 01.01.-31.03.2003.
Show the Status tab.
The status should be Fully Invoiced .
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 157/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-31
2-1 Working with a Single Pool Contract.
2-1-1 Create another UBB Service Contract with the individual object CM## 02 and other
than that, the same values as the first contract
Please refer to the solutions of the previous exercises and do the following steps:
- create a UBB Service Contract
- add individual object CM##02 to the object list on item level
- release the items and save the contract
- incept the contract using the Action Monitor
- enter installation readings 01.01.2003: 0 for A4 and A3.
- enter consumption readings 31.03.2003: 2000 on A4 and 2500 on A3.
2-1-2 Create a pool contract of type UBB Single Pool Con. for your customer ##Megastore.
Enter product SER_POOL with quantity 1.
SAP Menu Service Service Contracts and Service Plans Maintain
Service Contracts
Create a Pool Contract Single Pool Con.
Sold-To Party: ##Megastore
Product: SER_POOL
Quantity: 1
Choose ENTER.
Go to the item tab Billing Plan. Do you see any billing values?
No, there are no billing values.
Save the contract and note the number.
___________________
2-1-3 Link the two previously created contracts to the pool contract. Therefore open each UBB
service contract in change mode and execute action UBB: Assignment to a Pool
Contract (100). Choose 01.01.2003 as valid from date.
SAP Menu Service Service Contracts and Service Plans Maintain
Service Contracts
Open your first UBB service contract.
Choose the Actions icon ( ).
Choose UBB: Assignment to a Pool Contract (100).Valid From: 01.01.2003
Transaction ID: <your first contract number>
Choose Start .
Choose ENTER.
Save the contract.
Repeat the steps for your second UBB service contract.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 158/439
© SAP AG CR700 5-32
2-1-4 Take a look at the pool contract after the links have been made. Can you see the linkage
from the pool contract once the linkage is done?
Choose Open ( ) and enter the pool contract number.
Choose item tab Control Data (UBB).
You see the two UBB service contracts linked here.
On the item tab Status select the status Released.
Save the pool contract.
2-1-5 Prebill the first quarter (01.01.2003 – 31.03.2003) of the pool contract.
SAP Menu Service Usage-Based Billing Prebilling Pool Prebilling
Pool Contract Number: <your pool contract number>
Billing Doc. Created On: 01.01.2003 to 31.03.2003
Choose Execute.
2-1-6 Go back to the pool contract. Can you see a billing plan? Can you see the conditions
used?
Choose tab Billing Plan Item.
Notice the status is For billing and that prebilling has happened (Status Prebilled )
Look at the tab Conditions.
Notice the 500 copies in due that will equal 10 USD (Condition 2491).
2-1-7 Do billing of the pool contract. Do you bill a credit or a debit?
Maintain the Billing Due List.
Enter the document number of your Single Pool Contract, do a drop down, mark
the item choose Individual Billing and save.
You should get a credit of 10 USD with the billing item type UFSP.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 159/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-1
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 160/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-2
SAP AG 2004
Service Order
Resource Planning
Service Confirmation
Amount Allocation
Service Billing
Controlling Integration
Service Order Management
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 161/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Explain the basic functions of service order processing
Use the resource planning application to assign service employees to
service tasks
Process service confirmations
Describe CRM Billing options for service processes
Service Order Management: Unit Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 162/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-4
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management: Business Scenario
Support of the Complete Service Processing
Lifecycle from Service Quotation Creation toBilling
A single, powerful, yet user-friendly document
supports the call center agent or service technician to
perform the daily business
Even the most varied and complex of service
scenarios can be structured within the service order
and planned within the Resource Planning Tool
The full information is available for the field
technicians to perform the services on site and report
confirmation data
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 163/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-5
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
Create and
communicate
quotationMake inquiry
7
44
2 3
5
1
8
6
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,
performconfirmation
Create and
optimize
assignmentsApprove
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 164/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-6
SAP AG 2004
Header and Item Data
Header Data
Information that is valid for the service order as a whole
(For example, Service order number, status, description, priority, Sold-to Party, ...)
Item Data
Information that is valid for specific service order items only
(For example, service item number, status, description, quantity, unit
of measure, counter reading, subject codes, ...)
The service order is a document that can contain:
Services product items
Spare part items
Tool items
Sales product items
Expense items
As with all other CRM documents, the service process consists of header and item data. The service process functions are controlled by the transaction type.
You can find the priority and the category only on header level.
Objects can be IBase components or products. The subjects - damage, location, cause and task codes -
can be selected from catalogs.
Actions can be used for output determination and for escalation management.
Items describe the services that should be performed.
The item data depend on the type of service process item. The resource planning assignment appears
only for service product items, the schedule lines only for sales product items. Contract data appears
only when the item has been assigned to a service contract.
You can postprocess service processes in the CRM System at any time if you need to complete orchange data.
You can also save incorrect or incomplete transactions in the CRM System where they will be
available for postprocessing in the service process list.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 165/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-7
SAP AG 2004
A service product item is a product of type
Service.
A service product item describes the servicethat is to be performed.
A service product item includes information
about the planned duration and conditions.
By using the product proposal, the user can
select a service product from a list of services
offered for the product.
A service item can be assigned to an existing
service contract.
Installed Base components and products can
be assigned to a service item in the object list.
Service Product Item
Service processing is triggered by an item that contains a service product (no text items). The service product item describes a service. The item is used to document customer wishes (for example, with
reference to dates) and contains planning-relevant data.
Planning-relevant data includes the service group that is responsible for the performance of a service,
dates, the number of persons necessary for the execution of a service, the estimated duration, quantity
and, if required, the Relevant for resource planning indicator. The sales data must always be maintained
in the service product master.
You can display a product proposal for a reference object (product of the type Material ). The product proposal contains service products that are possible in connection with this reference object using the
product relationship type Service for . You can transfer the service products to the service process items
by selecting them. The product proposal is used as an entry aid.
The service is confirmed by creating a service confirmation as a follow-up document.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 166/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-8
SAP AG 2004
A spare part item is used to plan, control, and
document the required spare part components.
A spare part item is a product with type Material.
The spare part item informs the technician which
spare part is required for the service process.
A spare part item can be assigned to a service
contract.
Spare Part Item
The technician’s stock is represented by a• Technician consignment stock in SAP R/3 (SAP ECC)
• Customer consignment stock in SAP R/3 (SAP ECC)
• Storage Location in SAP R/3 (SAP ECC)
In SAP R/3 (SAP ECC) you define, which logistics scenario you would like to use:
• SAP Customizing Implementation Guide → Integration with Other mySAP.com Components →
Customer Relationship Management → Settings for Service Processing → Logistics Integration → Create and Change Logistics Scenario for Material Withdrawal
It is possible to create purchasing documents for CRM Service spare part items.
• SAP Customizing Implementation Guide → Integration with Other mySAP.com Components → Customer Relationship Management → Settings for Service Processing → Logistics Integration →
Set Purchasing Document Types for CRM Logistics Integration
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 167/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-9
SAP AG 2004
Tool Item
An item that is used when a service order is
carried out, but which is not consumed itself.
A tool item is a product with type Material.
You can enter tools in service order templates,
service orders and service confirmations.
You can enter tools for service orders and service confirmations in order to bill them to your customersand to determine and allocate internal costs. You can enter the number or the duration of use.
You enter individual tools as individual objects in SAP CRM
It is recommended to create a specific product category for Tools.
Standard item categories SRTT (service order template) SRQT (service quotation) , SRVT (service
order) and SVCT (service confirmation) are provided.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 168/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-10
SAP AG 2004
Within a service process, a sales product item is
used to sell a required spare part.
The sales product item informs the technicianwhich spare part is required for the service
process and delivered separately to the customer.
Within a service process, an Available-to-Promise
check can be performed for each sales product
item (SAP APO integration).
Sales Product Item
A sales product item creates• A demand in the Advanced Planner and Optimizer (APO).
• A sales order item in R/3. The corresponding sales order should be created with the same ordernumber as the CRM service process. You can create a delivery in R/3 for the sales order.
When creating a delivery, the system
• Performs an Available-to-Promise check
• Performs a demand settlement
• Creates delivery demands in the APO system
• Updates the CRM document (delivery number and quantity)
The goods issue deletes the delivery demand and updates the CRM document.
The billing document can be created based on the service process data or the delivery data (based on
sales item quantity or delivered quantity).
Prerequisites:
• Order type and item category are set up in the ERP system.
• Business partner and products of the type material exist also in the ERP system.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 169/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-11
SAP AG 2004
Expense Item
Each expense item documents an additional
invoice that is paid by the service representative,
e.g. hotel receipt. Each expense item updates the assigned
controlling object by reassigning amounts from
the service representative's cost center to the
relevant controlling object.
You are able to enter any expenses incurred during your service activities.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 170/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-12
SAP AG 2004
Item Hierarchy
Enables items within the service order and the service confirmation
to be structured in the form of a hierarchy
Used to show, for example, that certain spare parts belong to aservice or that a service consists of several individual services
Facilitates service order creation as partner and organization data is
inherited by sub-items from superior items
When you create a service order, you link the individual items to form a hierarchy by entering thenumber of the superior item in the field Higher-Level Item. As soon as you have maintained an higher-
level item, an additional tab Item Hierarchy displays where the item hierarchy is represented
graphically.
When values from sub-items are cumulated, this value is assigned to the higher-level item:
Pricing conditions can either be duplicated in all assigned sub-items or applied to the cumulated value of
all assigned sub-items.
A BAdI is provided to enable customers to define specific rules regarding the culmination of values.
• You are able to define how the durations and quantities are to be cumulated using the BadI
CRM_SERVICE_I_HIER_CUM.
• The standard delivery of SAP CRM includes the implementation CRM_SERVICE_I_CUM. Thisimplementation defines that only the sub-item quantities of the very next level are cumulated. If
these items themselves have sub-items with quantities, these quantities are not cumulated right up to
the top level.
• The condition 0KUM is available for the culmination of pricing data. For this, the condition type
must be entered in the calculation procedure and the calculation procedure must be assigned to the
sales organization.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 171/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-13
SAP AG 2004
Different settings according
to business transaction category
Additional business transaction categories
Dependent of leading business transaction category
Customizing at header level:
Assign business transaction categories
Transaction attributes and characteristics:Controlling attributes
Leading business transaction category
Define transaction type:
Service Process Customizing: Header
The standard transaction type for service transaction is SRVO. The standard transaction type for serviceconfirmation is SRVC . You can define your own transaction types in Customizing. For each transaction
type, you can define the different attributes that are required for a business process.
Attached to Transaction Type:
• Text determination procedure
• Partner determination procedure
• Status profile
• Organizational data profile.
• Date profile
• Action profile
• Number range
• Early number assignment: The number is created before saving the transaction.
• Increment item number
Each transaction type is assigned to a leading business transaction category. Service transaction is a
business transaction category of its own.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 172/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-14
SAP AG 2004
Sales:
Document pricing procedure
Credit check
Service:
Warranty Check Profile
Subject Profile
Show Counter
Business Activity:
Category
Calendar relevance
Priority
Business Transaction Category: Header
A business transaction type is assigned to one or more business transaction categories (for example,activity, sales). The business transaction category defines the business context in which the transaction
type can be used (for example, service, sales, activity). One business transaction category always is the
leading business transaction category. This is not related to other business transaction categories in a
hierarchical sense, but displays a preference.
For a Service Transaction, you must assign the business transaction categories Activity and Service
Transaction. Sales Transaction is optional but necessary for pricing.
For a Service Confirmation, you must assign the business transaction categories Activity and Service
Confirmation. Service Transaction and Sales Transaction are optional.
The document pricing procedure is used to determine the pricing procedure.
The subject profile is a grouping of code group profiles from different catalogs. This can be done on a
structured basis, which enables the creation of a hierarchy.
The transaction type for confirmation is selected when a confirmation is entered via hand-held
devices.
Business Activities: default values for Priority, Category, Destination and Direction. Processing the
Task , Calendar , and Subject profile fields has no effect, because these fields are not used in Service.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 173/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-15
SAP AG 2004
Sales:
Billing relevance
Pricing relevance
Credit Group
Quotation / Order Item
Service:
Resource Planning Relevance
Confirmation Relevance
Relevance to Costs
Service Type
Valuation Type
Subject Profile
Show Counter
Business Transaction Category: Item
Billing relevance: • Not relevant for billing
• Billing after confirmation
• Order-related billing according to order quantity
• Order-related billing according to delivery quantity
• Delivery-related billing
Pricing relevance: Price determination is activated for each item category using this indicator.
Resource Planning: This indicator controls whether or not a service product item displays in resource
planning. If a service product item is relevant to resource planning, a requirement is generated for it.
Confirmation: This indicator controls whether a service process item is relevant for confirmation.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 174/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-16
SAP AG 2004
Different settings according to business
transaction category
Assign business transaction categories
Only certain combinations are permitted
Customizing at item level:
Assign business transaction categories:
Item attributes and characteristics:Controlling attributes
Item object type
Define item category:
Service Process Customizing: Item
The following predefined item categories are contained in the standard CRM system and can be usedfor the service process:
• SRVP: You use this item category for service products, that is, products of the type Service.
• SRVM: You use this item category for spare parts, that is, products of the type Material.
• SRVS: You use this item category for service sales products, that is, products of the type Material
that can be sold and delivered via the R/3.
• SRVE: You use this item category for expense items.
• SVCP: You use this item category for service products confirmation.
• SVCM: You use this item category for service material confirmation.
• SVCE: You use this item category for expense confirmation.
First you define the general settings, which are the same attributes for all types of item categories.
• General data: item object type.
• Procedures and Profiles: text, partner, status, APO availability check (only for sales items, for spare
parts the R/3 availability information is used), organizational data, dates, actions.
In the second step, you define the business context for which the item category is used. Settings differ
depending on the assigned business transaction category.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 175/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-17
SAP AG 2004
Basic Functions & Master Data
Damage/Cause Codes
Codes can be entered both at
header and item level to describe
or categorize the service order
subject, such as:
Description, Cause, Reason,
Location
Reference Objects
Such as business partners, or
products can be entered at headerlevel or item level
Product Proposal
Product proposals can be
generated and selected as items
during service order creation
Damage/Causes, Codes• Codes, Catalogs and Profiles can be maintained in Customizing
• BW analyses could be defined based on the codes entered in the service order.
Reference objects are the basis for:
• Determining the responsible sales and service organization
• Generating product proposals, quantities, and durations
• Determining whether a contract or warranty exists
Product proposals example:
• Change ink cartridge is a service of the product Printer T610
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 176/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-18
SAP AG 2004
Contract Determination/Warranty Check
Contract Determination
The system checks automatically during
creation of the service order whethercontracts exists for the customer.
Warranty Check
The system checks automatically during
creation of the service order whether a
warranty exists for the product, object or
IBase that has been entered.
Credit Limit Check
It is possible to activate a credit check in
CRM Service Orders.
Contract Determination• Service Level Agreement (SLA) dates are determined on the basis of the contract and overwrite
standard response dates and times in the service order
• The object list in the service order shows which items are covered by the contract.
Warranty Check
• Warranty data displays on a separate tab in the service order
Credit Limit Check
• When a Service Order with Service Items is created and then released and saved, subsequent
processes such as the creation of assignments in the Resource Planning Tool are triggered.
• If a Credit Check is active, the setting of the Released status is prevented if:
- The manual or automatic credit check has not been performed
- The result of the credit check is not OK
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 177/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-19
SAP AG 2004
Counter Integration: Features
Counters
Can be assigned to: an Individual Object
an Installed Base
a Product
Counter Readings
Can be entered in:
CRM Service Orders
CRM Service Confirmations
CRM Service Plans
Counter Engine
Counter Administration Function
Possible counter reading scenarios include:• Recording service histories (for example, recording the mileage during the technical inspection of a
car)
• Claiming services
(for example, recording the number of times that a customer was in contact with your consultancy
team during an implementation project)
• Recording energy consumption
(for example, household gas or electricity readings)
• Assessing warranty claims based on consumption
(for example, a car warranty is only valid for the first 30,000 miles)
• Scheduling service plans(for example, the next scheduled maintenance work should be scheduled after 1000 operating hours)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 178/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-20
SAP AG 2004
Qualification Integration: Features
Qualification Requirements
Service orders and service order items can contain qualification
requirements
Qualification requirements are inherited by the service order items
from the service order header, and by sub-items from superior
items. They can also be changed manually by the user.
Qualification requirements can be assigned to the following:
Business Partner (Main Partner)
Installed Base Component,
Service Product
Individual Object
Qualifications
Can be fulfilled by human resources (e.g.
employees)
ExampleThe service item Domestic Rewiring has the qualification requirement NICEIC Certified , meaning that
the employee who is assigned to do the job must be an electrician approved by the NICEIC (National
Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Council).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 179/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-21
SAP AG 2004
Resource Planning: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Understand how to create resource planning relevant master data
Use the resource planning application
Describe the system landscape and relevant components
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 180/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-22
SAP AG 2004
The Resource Planning Application enables Resource
Planners to effectively manage, assign, and monitor
work to be performed by their service employees.
Resource Planning
Resources Demand
Companies can use service resource planning to schedule and monitor services requested by a customer.
As soon as a malfunction occurs in a product, the customer reports it to the service provider so that itcan be corrected. The resource planner can use the resource planning tool to schedule service employee
assignments to plan the necessary assignments on site, and to check that assignments are completed on
schedule.
Data about service employee availability and assignments is stored in the Workforce Management
Core (WFM Core).
In addition, you can use the integration with the Human Capital Management (HCM) component to
transfer time data for the individual service employees to the WFM Core, so that the time data is
available for resource planning.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 181/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 182/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-24
SAP AG 2004
Resource Planning System Landscape
mySAP
CRM
Business Object Layer
RFC Communication via BAdIImplementation CRM_SRV_SDL_RFC
RFC Communication via BAdI
Implementation CRM_SRV_SDL_WFM
BAdI CRM_SRV_SDL
WFD Server
Third PartyScheduler
SAP Exchange Interface (XI)
e.g. XML http/https
RFC Communication via BAdI
Implementation CRM_SRV_SDL_WFDS
ResourcePlanner
Application
WFM Core Add-On
The Workforce Deployment Server (WFD) is part of the Workforce Management (WFM) Add-on 200.
Please refer to note 947558 (“CRM 2005: Service Resource Planning Additional Upgrade Info”) if youare upgrading from CRM 4.0.
It is possible to use external scheduling engines for resource planning of CRM service order items.
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Settings for
Service Processes → Settings for Service Resource Planning → Notes for the Integration of
CRM/Scheduling Engine/HR
Use transactions SE18 (BAdI Builder) and SE19 (BAdI Implementation) to get information on the
CRM_SRV_SDL Business Add-In and its implementations.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 183/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-25
SAP AG 2004
Resource Planning Application (RPA)
Service employeesand their availability
Service demands
Assignments
Personalize
Resource planning functions supported within a web-based tool in the customer-centric environment
Users supported in the role of service resource planner to schedule and dispatch either order-based or project-based demands
New and enhanced functions include support of flexible resource and demand searches, ability to find
the most suitable resource for a selected demand, and consideration of additional business partner
attributes
Personalization options:
• Time (time zone; time unit; days per week; first day of week)
• Distance (Kilometers, Miles)
• Search (default search variants; default resource view; default staffing level)
A new portal role Service Resource Planner is provided.
The Resource Planning Tool (RPT) is still available.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 184/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-26
SAP AG 2004
The Resource Planning scenario can be performed
with or without integration to mySAP HCM:
mySAP HCM Integration
Integration to
mySAP HCM
Employee
master
data
Existing HR employees can
be created via ALE as CRM
Business Partners in the role
Employee
Employee
availability
data
Detailed availability data from
the service employee HR
calendar can be displayed in
CRM
Employee
qualification
data
Existing HR employee
qualifications can be created
using ALE in CRM
Basic availability data (work
schedule) can be defined at
Business Partner/service
arrangement level via time-
dependent templates
No integration to
mySAP HCM
Employees are created as
CRM Business Partners in the
role Employee in CRM
Employee qualifications and
qualification catalogs can be
created in CRM
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 185/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-27
SAP AG 2004
Resources
Employees Service Providers
Service Arrangement
Availability (templates)
Location (Geo-Code)
Service Area
Job Function
Qualification
Resources can directly be created via the Employee or Service Provider BSP (see slide). The resource isimmediately available for scheduling. It is not necessary to run a report (like in CRM 4.0).
The Service Arrangement tab contains resource planning relevant information:
• Availability: The days and times when the employee can be scheduled to meet a demand. The
availability times can be entered manually or via a predefined template.
• Location: Address of the individual employee or of the organization to which the employee belongs
to. Geo-Codes have to be used.
• Service Area: You use this to define the resource’s service area. A service area is a smaller grouping
of locations beyond the organizational structure identified as being available for resources to service.
Resources can be assigned to both a first-line area of service ( Primary Service Area) and a secondary
area of service ( Alternative Service Area). Example: ZIP Code• Job Function: Defines where the resource can be scheduled. Job functions might have further
granularity based on a level.
• Qualification: The employee’s qualifications and the proficiency level for each qualification.
IMG Settings (excerpt):
• Workforce Deployment → WFD Server → Business Settings for WFD Server → Resource Settings
→ Service Resource Planning
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 186/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-28
SAP AG 2004
Resource Overviews
Weekly View
Daily View
Gantt View
Weekly View:• A resource list where each day of the week is a column with a row for each resource. You can choose
from a series of data display options for each day’s cell data.
• Cell content data types:
- Assigned / available; booked / available; remaining; customer name; demand description; location
description; description of time allocation type
- You see an asterisk (*) at the end of the values contained in the cells “assigned/available”,
“remaining”, “booked / available” and “booked remaining” when the cells refer to external
resources with overall capacity as this information is not per day but per contract duration.
• You can enhance or modify the cell content and column data you see in the weekly view by
choosing: SAP IMG→
Customer Relationship Management→
Workforce Deployment→
Service Resource Planning→ Basic Settings→ Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)→ Business Add-In: Resource List
Display.
Daily View:
• The view provides an overview of resources and their assignments, time allocations and overall
availability within the period of one day.
Gantt View: (see note 817713 for details on the availability of the Gantt view).
• The view provides a graphic representation of resources and their assignments, time allocations and
overall availability within the selected period.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 187/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 188/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-30
SAP AG 2004
Demands
Item 10: Repair - 2 hours
Item of type Service Process
Item has status Released
Item is flagged as Resource Planning relevant
Service Order
Prerequisites:• Define Demand types, e.g. Service Order Demand, Project Demand
- SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management→ Workforce Deployment →
Service Resource Planning → Basic Settings → Specify Demand Types for Resource Planning
• Define a Scheduling Engine, e.g. WFDS (RPA in CRM) or CRM_SRV_SDL_RFC RFC (external
scheduling engine)
- SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management→ Workforce Deployment →
General Settings for Service Resource Planning → Select Scheduling Engine
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 189/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-31
SAP AG 2004
Assignment Processing
1.
2.
3.
Creating an assignment (see slide).• In Resource Overview select a resource
• In the Demand Overview select a demand
• In the Assignments section choose Create
You can display and change an assignments as well as an assignment list
The following process options are available when switching to an assignment header:
• Apply / Cancel
• Notify resource / notify customer
• Create a note• Delete
• Delete Groupware appointment
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 190/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-32
SAP AG 2004
Additional Features
Alert Management:
Possibility to trigger alerts via actions.
Resource capacity/interval times available check
Resource finishing project – capacity check (New)
Assignment when unavailable (New)
Qualification mismatch
Staffing of project roles (New)
Authorization Concept:
Possibility to flexibly define for which resources the service resourceplanner may perform scheduling based on the following resourceattributes:
Internal/external employees
Job function
Service area
Organizational unit
Workforce Management Analytics
Alert Management details:• Resource capacity/interval times available check: Triggered when a resource has completed his or
her last assignment for the day, but still has availability for working on additional demands
• Resource finishing project – capacity check: Triggered when a resource is approaching the end of his
or her project assignment and requires new assignments to be created; for example, two weeks before
project assignment is going to finish, one week before, and then a weekly reminder until consultant is
assigned to a new project
• Assignment when unavailable: Triggered when a resource is not available for performing an
assignment that has already been created (for example, resource is absent due to illness and new
absence record is transferred from HR)
• Qualification mismatch: Triggered when mandatory qualification, or skill requirements are notfulfilled for an assignment
• Staffing of project roles: Triggered if required effort is not covered, partially covered, or exceeded
Note: In CRM 5.0 the qualification mismatch alert does not include job function, as the job function isnot currently part of the demand object.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 191/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-33
SAP AG 2004
Appointment Scheduling
Appointment Interval: 08:00 - 10:00
Appointment intervalgroup “Morning”
08:00 - 10:00
10:00 - 12:00
Appointment intervalgroup “Afternoon”
14:00 - 16:00
16:00 - 18:00
Appointment intervalgroup “Whole Day”
08:00 - 10:00
10:00 - 12:0014:00 - 16:00
16:00 - 18:00
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Assignment: 09:00 – 13:00
Appointment Scheduling: Enables the customer to be provided with a choice of possible appointmentswhen a service assignment can be performed by a service employee at the customer site
Customizing of Appointment Scheduling
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Settings for
Service Processes → Settings for Service Resource Planning → Appointment Scheduling →
Scheduling Strategy
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 192/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-34
SAP AG 2004
Qualifications
Employee Qualifications
Describe the person’s the skills and licenses
Qualification Requirements
Are linked to
Business Partner (Main Partner)
IBase / Individual Object or
Service Product
It is possible to specify in Customizing how qualification
requirements should be determined in business transactions
Qualifications and Catalogs are maintained in Customizing:• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Workforce Deployment →
Service Resource Planning → Qualification Management → Maintain Scales
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Workforce Deployment →
Service Resource Planning → Qualification Management → Edit Qualification Catalog
Qualification
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Settings for
Service Processes → Settings for Service Resource Planning → Qualifications→ Define Parameters
for Qualification Requirements in Transaction
• SAP Implementation Guide → Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Settings for
Service Processes → Settings for Service Resource Planning → Qualifications→ Define Parameters
for Qualification Requirements for Item Category
Example
The service item Domestic Rewiring has the qualification requirement NICEIC Certified , meaning that it
must be performed by a field service employee who is an electrician approved by the NICEIC (National
Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Council).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 193/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-35
SAP AG 2004
Service Confirmation: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Create service confirmations
Describe the integration for service confirmation
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 194/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-36
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
Create andcommunicate
quotation
Make inquiry
7
4
2 3
5
1
8
6
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,
performconfirmation
Create and
optimize
assignmentsApprove
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 195/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-37
SAP AG 2004
A confirmation enables you to confirm not
only services and materials but also travel
and working times, and expenses for servicesfulfilled.
mySAP CRM offers full integration capabilities
so that subsequent processes in the ERP
backend system can be triggered
automatically.
Confirmations can be created online, via
mobile devices, via Internet or via Interaction
Center.
Confirmations that have been created offline
and uploaded to the mySAP CRM system can
be changed or completed.
Confirmation: Definition
A service confirmation is a business transaction used to enter the actual work performed and materialsconsumed within the context of a service process.
You can use service confirmations to enter working times (including travel time and overtime), distance
traveled, service products, and spare parts.
Confirmation reference document:
• Confirmations with or without a reference to a service process can be created and processed
• The planned working time in a service product is the proposal for confirmation
• Unplanned service confirmation items can be entered within a service confirmation
Confirmation volume:
• More than one confirmation is possible for a service process
• A service confirmation can include more than one service confirmation item
• Multiple assignments can be confirmed at the same time
The confirmation follow-up processes can be divided in:
• Internal processing in SAP ECC / SAP R/3
• External processing in CRM Billing
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 196/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 197/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-39
SAP AG 2004
Service
Process
Confirmation
1
Confirmation
2
Confirmation
3
Billing
Document
Service Confirmations with Service Process
You can create service confirmations with reference to service processes to enter the actual times andspare parts required for the completion of a service process. Prerequisites: The service process has the
status Released . You have made the settings necessary for copying control and have entered the date
type SRVC_ACTUAL (start of work/end of work) in the date profile.
Procedure: Open the service process for which you want to enter a confirmation and generate a
confirmation by creating a follow-up document. The confirmation screen appears. All service process
items (service products and spare parts) that can be confirmed are offered for selection. If resource
planning assignments exist for a service process, you are offered the relevant assignments for
confirmation instead of service product items. If necessary, change the actual quantities and transfer the
service or spare part items to the confirmation. Create any additional items in the confirmation that
were not part of the service process. If required, enter the service and valuation type for the confirmed
services. You use these types to differentiate between services for billing and controlling purposes.
Enter the damage code and/or cause. Set the status Completed and save the confirmation.
Result: Confirmed service items appear in the service process with the status Confirmed . Confirmed
assignments appear on the Assignment tab page of the service process with the status Completed . All
subsequent processes are triggered.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 198/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-40
SAP AG 2004
Item Hierarchy and Confirmation
Service Order Service Confirmation
Item1
Item 2
relevant
Item 3
Item 4
relevant
Item 5
Item 6
relevant
Item 7
relevant
Header
Item 2
relevant
Item 4
relevant
Item 6
relevantItem 7
relevant
The item hierarchy structure is
displayed in the confirmationwhen linked items are
confirmed:
Hierarchy
structure is not
shown in item
structure
Hierarchystructure
is shown
in item
structure
You are able to freely select the items and sub-items that you want to confirm. When doing this, if youchoose items that are linked directly to one another (for example, Item 6 and Item 7), the hierarchy
structure is shown in the Item Hierarchy tab of the confirmation.
Item 2 and Item 4 are not directly linked to one another and therefore, display as independent items in
the confirmation because the item that links them together (Item 3) is not relevant for confirmation.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 199/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-41
SAP AG 2004
Confirmation1
Confirmation
2
Confirmation
3
Billing
Document
Service Confirmations without Service Process
Using service confirmations without service process, a service employee can perform a service forwhich there is no existing service process and enter this service so that billing and all other subsequent
processes are triggered.
Example: A customer asks a service employee, who is on site due to another order, to perform a repair.
Because the device failed only an hour ago and therefore, the customer has not yet reported the problem,
there is no existing service process from which the confirmation can occur. In this case, the service
employee can perform the repair and subsequently create a confirmation. In this way, the working time
and spare parts required for the repair can be invoiced to the customer.
A service confirmation without a preceding document triggers CO-Integration.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 200/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-42
SAP AG 2004
Service Confirmation Additional Information
Service type
Enables working times to be differentiatedfor billing, for example as Senior Consultant,
Junior Consultant or Assistant
Valuation type
Enables working times to be differentiated,
for example, according to whether they are
working hours or overtime
Accounting indicator
Enables differentiation of normal
confirmation items and items for services,spare parts and expenses covered by a
warranty
Service Type• For each service type you can define different external prices for billing the customer
Valuation Type
• For each valuation type you can define:
- Prices for services billed to the customer
- Internal rates for employees
Accounting Indicator
• For each accounting indicator you can define:
- Different discounts for services billed to the customer
- Different settlement receivers, for example, in case of warranty or good will
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 201/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-43
SAP AG 2004
Time and Material Confirmation Items
Service Product
e.g. Repair, Maintenance,
Consulting
Spare Part
e.g. hard disk from van
stock
Material
Withdrawal
CATS TimeData
Follow-up
document
Expense Item
e.g. hotel receipt
CO
Reposting
Service product item: contains a product of the type Service. If the service product item contains a time
duration, time data is created in the Cross Application Time Sheet (CATS).
Confirmation relevant information in the service product:
• Description
• Planned duration
• Conditions
• Responsible sales area
This data includes default values for
• Working time confirmation
• Price determination in the billing
Spare part item contains a product of the type Material , which has been taken from the technician’sstock. With the service confirmation, a goods receipt from the technician’s customer consignment stock
can be created in ERP.
• Each product for spare part items has a corresponding material master in SAP ECC / SAP R/3.
• The inventory management administers the material stock.
Expense Item contains a product from the type Service. You have to perform the following step in order
to get the expense item costs on the controlling object
• Set up mapping for expense item category and cost element in the CRM specific part of the ERP
IMG
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 202/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-44
SAP AG 2004
ERP System
Costs
Salary
Material
Stock
WFM Core
Resource
Planning
CATS
CRM Billing
Billing Due List
Service Confirmation
Service Product Item
Spare Part Item
Delete
Demand
Create CATS
document
Create material
document
Follow-up Action From Confirmation
Expense Item CO
Reposting
Create CO
document
When you create a confirmation with reference to a service process with assignments, working time iscopied from these assignments to the confirmation document. When you confirm assignments, their
status is automatically changed to Completed in the resource planning tool (APO-WFM).
You can use service confirmations to trigger a sequence of external (customer-related) and internal
subsequent processes. In this context, billing is viewed as an external subsequent process and the
transfers to the HR, CO and MM components are viewed as internal subsequent processes. This is
controlled by the item category.
Time sheet (CATS) data is created by the confirmation of services, which is controlled using the flag Relevant for Distribution in the item category. The service type and the evaluation type play an
important role in this context and can be set in Customizing.
The CATS transfer to Controlling (CO) is necessary to create cost information. The data transferred
from CATS to HR is used as the basis for the payroll.
Goods movements are triggered in ERP when materials relevant to stock postings are confirmed.
CO Reposting takes place after the confirmation is set to completed. The costs will be settled from the
cost center to the internal order.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 203/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-45
SAP AG 2004
Follow-Up Processing: CATS
HR CO
Time Confirmation
Transfer to mySAP
Human Resources
(Report CAT6)
Transfer to mySAP
Financials
(report CAT7)
Determination of the Controllingobject / profitability segment
Determination of activity type and
absence and attendance type
based on service type and
valuation type
Determination of cost center based
on the personnel ID
Status of confirmation is
completed
CATS DB
CRM
Middleware
When distributing relevant confirmation data, integration with a Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) is required. CATS enables standardized, cross-application recording of employee working
times.
Entries are created in the CATS database. The entry contains the information about the CO object, the
activity type, the attendance type, the time, the personal ID, and so on.
When recording the confirmation in the CATS, the system uses the attendance type and the absence type
from this data entry profile and the activity type from the personal master record.
The mySAP Human Resources is updated with the report CAT6 . Confirmed working times are used as
the basis for the payroll.
Controlling is updated with the report CAT7 .
The actual costs are calculated based on the corresponding activity type and the performing cost center. Requirements:
• A personal master record for each service employee is required (replication of SAP ECC / SAP R/3
master data into mySAP CRM).
• The CATS data entry profile is required for the CRM system.
• CATS supports only entries for single days (including night shifts). The difference between the start
and end of work in the confirmation, therefore, cannot be more than 24 hours.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 204/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-46
SAP AG 2004
Material Confirmation: Logistics Integration
Different spare parts scenarios
supported
Spare parts at the service representative’s
storage location
Spare parts in the service representative’s
consignment stock
Spare parts in customer’s consignment
stock
Spare parts at the service representative’s storage location.• Each service representative’s stock is represented by a storage location in the service plant
Spare parts in the service representative’s consignment stock.
• The service representative’s stock is managed as service representative’s consignment stock.
• Identification occurs using the service representative’s unique personnel number which is managed
in the employee master record in SAP CRM and in the customer master record in SAP ECC / SAP
R/3.
Spare parts in customer’s consignment stock
• A stock of spare parts that is stored on the customer’s premises but does not belong to the customer
(for example, construction site equipment), and is managed as customer consignment stock
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 205/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-47
SAP AG 2004
Expense Confirmation: CO Reposting
Cost
Center CO Object
Expense
Confirmation
Determination of the Controllingobject / profitability segment
Determination of cost center
based on the personnel ID
Determination of cost element
based on customizing mapping
Status of confirmation is
completed
CO Reposting
CRM
Middleware
Receipt
The Service Technician reports an expense (e.g. hotel receipt) and is compensated through his costcenter.
A CO Reposting from Cost Center to CO Object (e.g. internal order) takes place.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 206/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-48
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Create an amount allocation for services that have been performed
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 207/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-49
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management
Create andcommunicate
quotation
Make inquiry
7
4
2 3
5
1
8
6
Convert
quotation into
service order
Accept
quotation
Execute
assignment,
performconfirmation
Create and
optimize
assignmentsApprove
confirmation,assign costs
Bill customer,
perform analyses
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 208/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-50
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation: Definition
Amount Allocation offers the ability to define who should
pay which expenses shortly before billing takes place.
Amount Allocation allows:
Grouping of items and sub-items
Description of price reductions with the accounting indicator
Splitting (on header and item level for Service Order and Service
Confirmation with inheritance from header to item) into different
payers or bill-to-parties
Expenses
RecipientRecipient
RecipientRecipient
Recipient
You can use amount allocation to allocate the value of a billing document, or the value of individualitems in a service order to several invoice recipients or payers. You can make this allocation in the order
or in the confirmation, or in the amount allocation document itself, whereby allocation to the respective
follow-up document is copied as a default value but can still be changed.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 209/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-51
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation
Confirmation BillingOrder
Billing
Document
Release
Amount
Allocation
When Does the Process Take Place?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 210/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-52
SAP AG 2004
Amount Allocation Process
For items released for billing
Billing-relevant items from the
service order and
confirmations
Changing
of rule for
amount
allocation
Overview
of billed
items
Overview
of items
with errors
Release
for billing
Amount Allocation
Possible to define shortly before billing takes place, who should pay which expenses• Often, prices are defined at a very late stage flexible price changes are possible
• Settlement information is not always known at the time of order creation
• Checks and corrections can be performed shortly before billing takes place
- Change of billing relevance (for example, warranty, goodwill)
- Change of invoice recipient
• A field service employee can often not decide himself, how much the customer or the insurers should pay
The settlement of expenses is possible at different times during the service process:
• Settlement is performed monthly, even if the service has not yet been completed
• Settlement is performed once the service has been completed
• Partial billing of services possible
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 211/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-53
SAP AG 2004
Splitting of Items
10 Repair 100 Hours 1000 Euros
40 % 60 %
Customer Insurer
Splitting (on header and item level) for Service Order and Service
Confirmation with inheritance from header to item into different
payers or bill-to-parties by:
Percentage
Value
Quantity (only on item level)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 212/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-54
SAP AG 2004
Grouping of Items
Material 50% Customer
50% Insurer
Service 20% Customer
80% Insurer
10 Repair 100 Hours
20 Tires 4 Pieces
1000 Euros
400 Euros
Rule for Amount Allocation
Items in the Order
Rule is inherited
Definition:
Grouping of items links items together and provides them with thesame split and billing information
The grouping term can be entered on header or item level
Flexible grouping possibilities• Grouping of items is possible, for example:
- Customer pays completely for all materials, but only pays 50% of the expenses for services
• Grouping of items can be derived from the product type
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 213/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-55
SAP AG 2004
Service Billing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Create billing documents for services that have been performed
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 214/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-56
SAP AG 2004
CRM Billing: the central component for billing time, materials and
expenses for services performed
CRM Billing can be used for order-related billing
Resource-Related Billing: bill services according to confirmed
services and materials
CRM Billing
Standard CRM service processes are CRM Billing relevant.
A sales order is created in the ERP system for sales items so that these items can be delivered usingSAP ECC / SAP R/3. The sales item should be flagged as not billing relevant in ERP. Billing for these
items thereby occurs in the CRM system using CRM Billing.
You can choose between flat-rate billing and resource-related billing or combine both ways.
Prerequisites for CRM:
• Pricing must have occurred for billing to take place. Pricing occurs in all service documents
according to the general pricing for the CRM System.
• You have made settings in the business transaction category Sales in Customizing for the item
category. These settings define whether and, if yes, how billing should occur.
• Billing data is updated for accounting from CRM Billing.
• In each case, revenue is updated in the relevant controlling object, an internal order or a profitability
segment.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 215/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-57
SAP AG 2004
Transaction-related
Transaction-related
after confirmation
Transaction-related
according to
delivery quantity
Delivery-related
Billing Options
Service Confirmation
Service Product Item
Spare Part Item
Service Process
Service Product Item
Spare Part Item
Sales Product Item
Expense Item
Expense Item
Billing
Due
List
How services are billed is triggered by the Billing Relevance indicator in the item category.
Transaction-related billing: In CRM, the Billing Engine is called up for a transaction, for billing theorder quantity. This billing type is used for a flat-rate billing with reference to a service process item or
for resource-related billing with reference to a service confirmation item.
Transaction-related billing after confirmation: In CRM, the Billing Engine is called up for a service
process item for billing the order quantity (flat-rate), if the item has been confirmed. Furthermore, the
items have to be released for billing (transaction CRM_SRVBIL).
Transaction-related billing according to delivery quantity: In CRM, the Billing Engine is called up
for a sales product item, for billing the cumulated delivery quantity. The delivery in SAP R/3 returns the
delivery quantity to the sales product item.
Delivery-related billing: Deliveries for sales product items in R/3 are billed with the Billing Engine in
CRM. In the last two cases, you must make sure that the corresponding item category in R/3 is set to
Not relevant for billing .
Two different scenarios are used depending on whether you have agreed on a fixed price with the
customer or whether resource-related billing should take place.
• Fixed Price: In this case, the service process item must be flagged as billing-relevant, however, the
confirmation item must not.
• Resource-Related Billing: The confirmation item must be flagged as billing relevant, however, the
service process item must not. You can also combine fixed price and resource-related billing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 216/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-58
SAP AG 2004
External Billing of Service Transactions (ERP Billing)
Service Contract
Service Order
Service Confirmation
Pricing = ERP Pricing
Products = ERP Materials
Billing relevance = External
billing
Debit Memo Request
billing relevant item
billing relevant item
…
SAP CRM SAP ECC / SAP R/3
External Billing of Service Orders and Service Confirmations• Data is transferred to ERP when an order or confirmation is set to Completed .
• You can cancel invalid items by specifying a reason. The cancellation reason is transferred to ERPthrough item category mapping, and either the relevant debit memo request item is automatically
canceled or, if the item has already been billed, a credit memo request is created.
• After data transfer, you can cancel or reject transactions in SAP CRM. If it is no longer possible to
cancel individual items later on in the process, for example because an invoice has already been
created for a debit memo request, you can create a credit memo request in ERP to reverse a debited
amount.
External Billing of Service Contracts
• Billing request items generated by a billing plan are transferred automatically to ERP. Servicecontract items that are relevant for billing are transferred when contract data is updated and a
contract item is marked as Released .
In a standard CRM it is not possible to use ERP Billing for transactions of type Complaint or In-House
Repair.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 217/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-59
SAP AG 2004
Synchronize pricingtep
Synchronize master datatep 2
Customizing of CRM item categoriestep 3
Customizing of ERP sales orderstep 4
Mapping of transaction datatep 5
Customizing and condition records
Business partners and material master
Set billing relevance to External billing
Set billing relevance
CRM transaction type = ERP sales document type
CRM item category = ERP item category
ERP Mapping-Customizing (→ notes)
Prerequisites for ERP Billing
Modification of CRM Service Transaction Data Before Transfer to ERP
You can influence header and item data, such as partners and conditions, before it is transferred to ERP.
To do this, create an implementation of the Business Add-In (BAdI) CRM_EXT_BILLING ( Influencing
Data from Service Processes for Billing in ERP ). You can find this BAdI in SAP CRM Customizing
under Customer Relationship Management → Transactions→ Settings for Service Processes→
Business Add-Ins. For more information, see the documentation for this BAdI.
Modification of Sales Order Data in ERP Before Data Import
You can modify data such as the order reason, billing block, partner, and conditions.
To do this, create an implementation of the BAdI SRV_BILLING_CHANGE. You can find this BAdI
in Customizing for your Plug-In or SAP ERP system under Integration with Other mySAP.com
Components→ Customer Relationship Management→ Settings for Service Processing→ Billing Integration→ BAdI: Influencing Data for External Billing of CRM Service Documents.
Mapping of transaction types and item categories (in ERP System):
• SAP Customizing Implementation Guide → Integration with Other mySAP.com Components →
Customer Relationship Management → Settings for Service Processing → Billing Integration →
Map Transaction Types and Item Categories
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 218/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-60
SAP AG 2004
Service Controlling: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Describe the options for controlling integration
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 219/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-61
SAP AG 2004
mySAP Financials Integration enables
smooth communication between SAP CRM
and SAP ECC / SAP R/3. You can define your company’s controlling-
relevant service processes.
You can also use the mySAP Financials
integration to qualify and analyze the entire
value flow for a service process including
costs and revenues.
Controlling Integration
You can use the integration of service and sales processes with Controlling in mySAP Financials totransfer controlling-relevant data from CRM to an ERP system. In this way, you can analyze the entire
value flow (including costs and expenses) for services and sales orders.
You can display and evaluate costs and revenue for services, for example, for each product category or
service organization.
Services are billed using CRM Billing. Costs are either updated to the profitability segment or to the
internal order.
Sales orders are billed using CRM Billing or ERP Billing. Expenses are updated to the profitability
segment. Costs are updated only for delivery-related billing.
The service confirmation updates the costs for the consumption of resources either to the profitability
segment or to the internal order.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 220/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-62
SAP AG 2004
Controlling Types
Three Controlling Types
Mass-Object Controlling
Single-Object Controlling
Controlling for Account Assignment
Recipient
The customer must make the settings for all transaction types in the Controlling Integration table.
The customer defines transactions types, organizational units and so on in the CRM System and mustreplicate these in R/3. The customer then makes the following settings in Customizing:
Business Scenario
• Technical settings that control the interaction between the application and ERP Controlling are
defined using the business scenario
• There is the business scenario for CRM Service and for CRM Sales
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 221/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 222/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-64
SAP AG 2004
Single Object Controlling
Single Object Controlling
Controlling by service order or by service contract
Cost and revenues are assigned to the internal order
Overheads and process costs can be applied
Results analysis
If you use settlement of costs and revenues to CO-PA aggregated
analysis on CRM attributes is possible
Settlement of costs and revenues to CO-PA or other recipients
Original CRM attributes are available on the internal order
In SAP ECC / SAP R/3, the single object controlling´s level is defined for each relevant transactiontype, service unit, and responsible service unit.
For the controlling type single object controlling , you have to define a controlling scenario.
• The following parameters are defined by the controlling scenario:
- Pricing procedure, Overhead key, Results analysis key
- Settlement profile, Object class, Residence time 1 and 2 for the archiving
- CO partner update
The controlling relevant characteristics are replicated to SAP ECC / SAP R/3.
It is possible to differentiate the calculation of costs for the following:
• Special qualifications, such as for a specialist or apprentice
• Standard working time, overtime, driving hours, and so on
You differentiate the calculation of costs by doing the following:
• Replicating the item category, the service type, and the valuation type into ERP (based on the CRM
customizing) and
• Defining some transformation in the Plug-In customizing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 223/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-65
SAP AG 2004
Additional Features for Single Object Controlling
Additition Features for Single Object Controlling
Planned Costs and Revenues Accounting Indicator
Cockpit for Controlling Integration
Planned Costs and Revenues• Determination of planned costs including surcharges based on order planning for services, spare
parts and expenses
• Determination of planned revenues based on billable services, spare parts and expenses within aservice order
• Comparison of planned and actual values on an internal order representing a service order
Accounting Indicator
• Confirmation of used resources with information about the reason e.g. warranty, good will
• Differentiation of actual costs in addition to cost element
• Determination of different settlement receivers based on accounting indicator via customizing
• More accurate calculation of work in process possible Cockpit for Controlling Integration
• Manages error messages that are only relevant for Controlling
- The internal order for a service order can be created, the settlement rule can not be created. This is
irrelevant for the CRM process, but is relevant for the Controlling process
- Errors occurred during costing are only shown in the cockpit
• Supports the maintenance of master data and settlement rules for internal orders belonging to serviceorders or confirmations
• Integrates reporting for the controlling of internal orders
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 224/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-66
SAP AG 2004
Controlling for Account Assignment
Controlling for Account Assignment Object
Controlling by service order or by service confirmation
Cost and revenues are assigned to the cost receiver
Supports the receiver types: internal order, WBS element, sales
order item, network activity or customer defined cost receivers
via business add-in
Additional controlling functions depending on receiver type
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 225/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-67
SAP AG 2004
CRM
R/3
Availability Information
(On plant Level)
Service Order
Service Item
Spare Part 1
Spare Part 2
ERP
Reservation
(on plant Level)
Dispatching of
Service Technician
Reservation
ATP information
Disposition
Delivery
Material Confirmation
Stock Update(depending on
Logistic Scenario)
Update of Reservation
Goods Issue
Update Reservation
Logistic Integration
Transfer Parameter Goods Movement• You can define different movement types and special stock indicators that are required by an external
system to execute a goods movement.
• The movement type and special stock indicator created are dependent on transaction types and item
categories
Mapping Plant and Storage Location to Service Structure
• You can define which plant and which storage location of this plant is assigned to a combination of
service organization, service team, and service employee.
• The assignment applies to service processes in CRM Online and is used to determine the correct
plant and storage location when withdrawing or reserving spare part items
Availability-to-Promise Information for Service
• During the service order creation, availability information from ERP is possible.
Reservation
• You can create a reservation after saving the service order.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 226/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-68
SAP AG 2004
Valuation Types for pricing, for example
Junior consultant
Senior consultant
Service Types for pricing, for example
Weekend time
Night time
Settings for Service Processes
Valuation types are used as a basis for the pricing of services.
For example, you can define different prices depending on the qualifications profile for individualservice representatives.
Service types represent the basis for pricing and are used to differentiate a general product master for a
service with regard to its price. You can do this using an absolute or percentage markup or discount.
Example: Working time on the weekend is marked up by 20% and working time on a public holiday by
50%. Therefore, you can specify a basic price of 100 EUR for the repair time for a washing machine
and use markups to define that the service costs 120 EUR on the weekend and 150 EUR on a public
holiday.
The following two prerequisites must be fulfilled to ensure that pricing works:
• The service type must be entered in the corresponding transaction item.
• A condition must be available that takes into account the service types.
If you transfer confirmation items to ERP as CATS documents and want to determine different
attendance and absence types, depending on the service types, you must specify the service types
accordingly and assign attendance or absence types to the service types in Customizing for the relevant
ERP system.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 227/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-69
SAP AG 2004
Replication of CRM data to ERP :
Transaction types
Item categories
Organizational units
Service types
Valuation types
Product categories
Controlling Type and Level
Controlling Scenario
For Single Object Controlling
Controlling Integration
Replication: You can replicate the characteristics of service processes (contracts, orders andconfirmations) that you want to use for Controlling in ERP.
The Controlling Scenario is needed for single object controlling and defines how the internal orders
that are created from CRM are described. The following parameters are defined by the controlling
scenario: costing sheet, overhead key, results analysis key, settlement profile, object class, and
functional area.
The Controlling Type and Controlling Level are defined for combinations consisting of a transaction
type, a service organization, and a responsible service organization for a certain validity period. Thereare several options:
• No Controlling
• Mass-Object Controlling (profitability segment)
• Single-Object Controlling (internal order) on business transaction level
• Single-Object Controlling (internal order) on item level
• Controlling for Account Assignment
If you assigned single-object controlling to the Controlling type, you must also specify the Controlling
Scenario.
For single-object controlling, the internal order is always created with the order type SAPS .
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 228/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-70
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Management: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Explain the basic functions of service order processing
Use the resource planning application to assign service
employees to service tasks
Process service confirmations
Describe CRM Billing options for service processes
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 229/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-71
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Order
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a new transaction type for service orders
• Create and process a service order
You make yourself familiar with service order management
functions and create you own transaction type for service orders.
These service orders will further be processed.
1-1 Create a new transaction type for service orders and adapt it so that it meets yourrequirements. After completing the necessary customizing steps, test you new transaction
type.
1-1-1 Create a new transaction type ZS## for Service Orders. Copy the existing entry ZSE1
and enter the following data:
The standard transaction type for service orders is SRVO.For training purposes you copy ZSE1.
Transaction Type: ZS##
Description (short): ##Service Order
Description (long): ## Service Order
1-1-2 Since you would like to enter different kinds of products, maintain item category
determination for the newly created transaction type.
Transaction
Type
Item Category
Group
Item Category
Usage
Main Item
CategoryItem Category
ZS## Service item ZSRP
ZS## Standard item SRVM
ZS## Driving Time ZDRT
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 230/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-72
1-1-3 Analyze the item categories ZSRP and SRVM that will be used within service orderslater on.
What are the item object types of those item categories?
Which item category is resource planning relevant?
Which item category is confirmation relevant?
1-1-4 Replicate service characteristics (Transaction Types) relevant to ERP controlling.
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship
Management Transactions Settings for Service
Processes Integration Replicate Service
Characteristics Relevant to Controlling
2-1 Test your settings and create a service order of type ##Service Order (ZS##).
2-2-1 Enter the following data:
Description: ##First Serviceorder
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Product (Service): SRV1_4
Quantity: 2 AU
Product (Spare Part): R-1130
Quantity: 1 PC
If a service contract is determined, assign the service order items to it.2-2-2 Create a second service item with product SRV1_6, quantity 1. What difference to the
first service item do you observe?
2-2-3 Check for resource planning - and confirmation relevance for all line items.
2-2-4 How can you integrate service order templates (predefined repair steps and necessary
spare parts) into service order creation?
2-2-5 Where can you specify the number of persons necessary to perform the service?
2-2-6 Who is the responsible service technician group for the service item(s)?
2-2-7 Can you add tool items to the service order? Why or why not?
2-2-8 Release all items, save the service order, note the number and add it to your favorites.
_________________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 231/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-73
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Resource Planning
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Understand resource planning relevant master data
• Start and personalize the Resource Planning Application(RPA).
• Create an assignment for a service order item.
The Resource Planning Application (RPA) allows a resource
planner to assign the service technician(s) to the service tasks. Itoffers several functions to optimize assignment processing andallows the resource planner to monitor the assignment status.
3-1 Log on to the portal as a resource planner and find the business partner Lou Windham.
Display the details of the employee and check resource planning relevant data.
3-1-1 What are the general availability times of Lou Windham?
3-1-2 When maintaining availability times it is possible to use templates which are defined in
customizing. Check the content of the template STANDARD. Which rules are included? SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship
Management Workforce Deployment WFD Server
Business Settings for WFD Server Resource Settings
Define Availability Templates
3-1-3 What are the qualifications of Lou Windham?
3-1-4 Is Lou Windham assigned to a service area? What is the purpose of service areas and
where are they defined?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 232/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-74
4-1 Call the Resource Planning Application (RPA) and make yourself familiar with it.
Before you start to use this application, you would like to personalize several settings.
4-1-1 Use the general personalization (top right) settings within the RPA and set the timezone to Mountain Time (Denver) - 7 hours. Make Monday the first day of the week.
4-1-2 Create two selection variants for the Resource - and the Demand Overview.
a) Open the Advanced Search and list all Resources that belong to organizational unitUS Service Employee Group 1.
Save this selection as Team1_R## and close the Advanced Search.
b) Open the Advanced Search and list all Demands that belong to organizational unit
US Service Employee Group 1.
Save this selection as Team1_D## and close the Advanced Search.
4-1-3 Optionally you can assign both variants as defaults in the general personalizationsettings.
4-1-4 List both resources and demands with the newly created selection variants and for the
Repair item create an assignment for service technician Lou Windham. Overwrite thedefault begin and end date/time and choose a 30 minutes slot in the near future, e.g.tomorrow or the day after tomorrow.
Set the assignment status to Assigned and notify the service representative via e-mail.
Overwrite the default e-mail address and enter crm-##[email protected] .
This e-mail will appear in the Business Workplace (SAP GUI) of user CRM-##.
4-1-5 Using the Staffing Level, change the selection of demands and only list items that arenot staffed yet. Your service order item should no longer be visible.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 233/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-75
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Confirmation
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Maintain copying control Service Order to ServiceConfirmation
• Create a service confirmation
• Understand the ERP integration into the Cross-ApplicationTime Sheet
Service technicians create service confirmations as follow-updocuments to service orders in order to report actual duration ofserivce tasks, the usage of spare parts and possible expenses.
5-1 Create a service confirmation with reference to your service order. Transfer all
confirmation-relevant items.
5-1-1 In Customizing maintain copying control for transaction types and create a new entry. It
should be possible for your new service order transaction type ZS## to create a follow-
up Service Confirmation (ZSEC).
In this case it is not necessary to maintain copying control for item categories since
predefined item categories are used and copying already is maintained.
5-1-2 Before you can confirm the service item, go to the resource planning application and
change the status of the assignment to Released.
5-1-3 Create a follow-up Service Confirmation, transfer all confirmation-relevant items and
enter the following data:
Executing Service Employee: Lou Windham
Change the order quantity of the repair item to 1 AU.
5-1-4 In customizing (of the ERP system) check the integration settings relevant for the Cross-
Application Time Sheet (CATS).
Which ERP data entry profile is used for service confirmations transferred from SAP
CRM?
Which activity types are derived for the confirmation item repair and for the driving
time?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 234/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-76
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 235/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-77
Exercises
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Billing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a billing document for a Service Confirmation
The standard CRM serivce processes are CRM billing-relevant.
After the service technicians have completed the serviceconfirmations, it is possible to process the billing due list in order
to create billing documents (in SAP CRM).
6-1 Standard CRM service processes are CRM billing-relevant. Create a billing document in
the CRM system and check for successful ERP transfer.
6-1-1 Maintain the billing due list and create a billing document for the service confirmation
your created earlier.
Can you explain the billing value for the repair item if you compare it with the service
confirmation?
6-1-2 Check the document flow of the billing document. Do you see accounting documents?
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 236/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-78
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 237/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-79
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Service Order
1-1 Create a new transaction type for service orders and adapt it so that it meets yourrequirements. After completing the necessary customizing steps, test you new transaction
type.
1-1-1 Create a new transaction type ZS## for Service Orders. Copy the existing entry ZSE1
and enter the following data:
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Architecture and Technology Configuration Customizing
Choose SAP Reference IMG .
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Transactions
Basic Settings Define Transaction Types
Choose the button Position.
Transaction Type: ZSE1
Choose ENTER, mark the entry and choose Copy As ( ).
Transaction Type: ZS##Description (short): ##Service Order
Description (long): ## Service Order
Choose ENTER to start the copy process.
Confirm the pop-up and save the data.
1-1-2 Since you would like to enter different kinds of products, maintain item category
determination for the newly created transaction type.
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Transactions
Basic Settings Define Item Category Determination
Choose the button New Entries and enter the the data given in the exercise.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 238/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-80
1-1-3 Analyze two item categories ZSRP and SRVM that will be used within service orders
later on.
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Transactions
Basic Settings Define Item Categories
Choose Position.
Item Category: ZSRP
Mark the entry and choose Details ( ).
Item Object Type: CRM Service Product Item
In the structure tree on the left double-click Assignment of Business Transaction
Categories.
Choose Service Process.
In the structure tree on the left double-click Customizing Item.
What are the item object types of those item categories?
The item category is both resource planning and confirmation relevant.
Repeat the steps above for item category SRVM.
Item Object Type: CRM Service Material Item.
The item category is confirmation relevant.
1-1-4 Replicate service characteristics (Transaction Types) releavant to ERP controlling.
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Transactions
Settings for Service Processes Integration Replicate Service Characteristics
Relevant to Controlling
Mark Transaction Types and choose Execute ( ).
2-1 Test your settings and create a service order of type ##Service Order (ZS##).
2-2-1 SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Maintain Service Processes
Create a Service Process ##Service Order.
Description: ##First Serviceorder
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Choose the button Item Details.Choose tab Services.
Product (Service): SRV1_4
Quantity: 2 AU
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 239/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-81
Choose tab Spare Parts.
Product (Spare Part): R-1130
Quantity: 1 PC
If a service contract is determined, assign the service order items to it.
PC UI:
Choose Service Processing Service Orders.
Choose New 20Service Process.
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Description: ##First Serviceorder
Choose tab Products and Add Entry.
Product (Service): SRV1_4
Quantity: 2 AU
Confirm the entry and choose Add Entry again.
Product (Spare Part): R-1130
Quantity: 1 PC
2-2-2 Create a second service item with product SRV1_6, quantity 1. What difference to the
first service item do you observe?
SAP GUI:
Choose tab Services.
Product (Service): SRV1_6
Quantity: 1 H
The item category is ZDRT and the field Service Type has a default value S5 (Driving
Time).
PC UI:
From the drop-down list choose Services.
Choose Add Entry.
Product (Service): SRV1_6
Quantity: 1 H
The item category is ZDRT and the field Service Type has a default value S5 (Driving
Time).
2-2-3 Check for resource planning - and confirmation relevance for all line items.
SAP GUI:Check the corresponding flags in the Item Details.
The service item Repair is resourceplanning-relevant and confirmation-relevant.
The service item Driving Time confirmation-relevant.
The spare part item Keyboard is confirmation-relevant.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 240/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-82
PC UI:
From the drop-down list choose Services and Spare Parts.
The service item Repair is resourceplanning-relevant and confirmation-relevant.
The service item Driving Time confirmation-relevant.
The spare part item Keyboard is confirmation-relevant.
2-2-4 How can you integrate service order templates (predefined repair steps and necessary
spare parts) into service order creation?
SAP GUI:
Choose tab Overview.
Choose Include Template ( ).
PC UI:
From the drop-down list choose Overview.
Choose button Templates.2-2-5 Where can you specify the number of persons necessary to perform the service?
SAP GUI / PC UI:
In the item details of a service item choose tab Assignment .
2-2-6 Who is the responsible service technician group for the service item(s)?
SAP GUI / PC UI:
Choose tab Partners for all three items.
Service Technician Group: Service US1 (Org Unit 50004983)
2-2-7 Can you add tool items to the service order? Why or why not?
As long as item category determination is not maintained (tools use standard item
category and - group SRVT), tool items can not be added to your newly createdtransaction type.
2-2-8 Release all items, save the service order, note the number and add it to your favorites.
SAP GUI:
Choose the button Fast Entry.
Choose the Status button and Released .
Choose Save.
PC UI:
Choose button Service Status Release Items.
Choose Save.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 241/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-83
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Resource Planning
3-1 Log on to the portal as a resource planner and find the business partner Lou Windham.Display the details of the employee and check resource planning relevant data.
3-1-1 What are the general availability times of Lou Windham?
PC UI:
Choose Workforce Management Employees.
Choose Show Advanced Search.
Last Name: Windham
Choose Go. Mr. Lou Windham should be listed.
Choose Go To Details.
Choose tab Service Arrangement .
Choose tab Availability.
Lou Windham is available Monday through Friday 8 am until 5 pm.
Leave this browser session open.
3-1-2 When maintaining availability times it is possible to use templates which are defined in
customizing. Check the content of the template STANDARD. Which rules are included?
SAP GUI:
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Workforce
Deployment WFD Server Business Settings for WFD Server Resource
Settings Define Availability Templates
Choose entry STANDARD and check the details of the template.
Two rules (BREAK , WORK ) are included. Go to the individual details for more
information.
3-1-3 What are the qualifications of Lou Windham?
PC UI:
Choose tab Qualification.
Lou Windham has a very good proficiency in Microsoft XP and UNIX.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 242/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-84
3-1-4 Is Lou Windham assigned to a service area? What is the purpose of service areas and
where are they defined?
PC UI:
Choose tab Service Area.
Lou Windham is assigned to Primary Service Area US-CO.
A service area is a smaller grouping of locations beyond the organizational structureidentified as being available for resources to service. Resources can be assigned to both a
first-line area of service (Primary Service Area) and a secondary area of service(Alternative Service Area).
Service Areas are defined in the customizing.
SAP GUI:
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Workforce
Deployment WFD Server Business Settings for WFD Server Resource
Settings Define Service Areas.
4-1 Call the Resource Planning Application (RPA) and make yourself familiar with it. Beforeyou start to use this application, you would like to personalize several settings.
4-1-1 Use the general personalization (top right) settings within the RPA and set the time
zone to Mountain Time (Denver) - 7 hours. Make Monday the first day of the week.
PC UI:
Choose Workforce Management Resource Planning .
Choose the link Personalize next to the link Help.
Make the settings accordingly and save the data.4-1-2 Create two selection variants for the Resource - and the Demand Overview.
a) Open the Advanced Search and list all Resources that belong to organizational unit
US Service Employee Group 1.
In the Resource Overview choose Open Advanced Search.
For the field Org. Unit choose Possible Entries ( ).
Object Name: *US Service*
Choose Find .
In the result list mark US Service Employee Group 1 and choose Transfer .Choose Save Query As.
Enter the query name Team1_R## and choose Save.
b) Open the Advanced Search and list all Demands that belong to organizational unitUS Service Employee Group 1.
In the Demand Overview choose Open Advanced Search.
Repeat the steps from above.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 243/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-85
4-1-3 Optionally you can assign both variants as defaults in the general personalization
settings.
4-1-4 List both resources and demands with the newly created selection variants and for the
Repair item create an assignment for service technician Lou Windham. Overwrite the
default begin and end date/time and choose a 30 minutes slot in the near future, e.g.
tomorrow or the day after tomorrow.
Select both resources and demands using your newly created selection variants.
In the Resource Overview mark the employee Lou Windham.
In the Demand Overview mark the repair item (item number 10).
In the Assignments area choose the button Create.
Choose the Begin Date/Time and End Date/Time accordingly.
Set the assignment status to Assigned and notify the service representative via e-mail.Overwrite the default e-mail address and enter crm-##[email protected] .
This e-mail will appear in the Business Workplace (SAP GUI) of user CRM-##.
Choose Apply to save your assignment.
4-1-5 Using the Staffing Level, change the selection of demands and only list items that are
not staffed yet. Your service order item should no longer be visible.
In the Demand Overview choose Open Advanced Search.
Staffing Level: A (Not Staffed).
Choose Search.
The service order item that got the assignment is no longer visible in the list.
Leave this browser session open.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 244/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-86
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 245/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-87
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Resource Planning
5-1 Create a service confirmation with reference to your service order. Transfer allconfirmation-relevant items.
5-1-1 In Customizing maintain copying control for transaction types and create a new entry. It
should be possible for your new service order transaction type ZS## to create a follow-
up Service Confirmation (ZSEC).
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Architecture and Technology Configuration Customizing
Choose SAP Reference IMG .
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Transactions
Basic Settings Copying Control for Business Transactions Define Copying
Control for Transaction Types
Choose New Entries.
Source trans.: ZS##
Tgt. Trans. Type: ZSEC .
Save your entry.
In this case it is not necessary to maintain copying control for item categories since
predefined item categories are used and copying already is maintained.
5-1-2 Before you can confirm the service item, go to the resource planning application andchange the status of the assignment to Released.
PC UI:
Either continue with your browser session or choose Workforce Management
Resource Planning .
Use your selection variant Team1_R## to select resources.
Mark Lou Windham.
Choose Show Assignments.
Mark the Assignment and choose Show Details.
Change the Assignment Status to Released and choose Apply.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 246/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-88
5-1-3 Create a follow-up Service Confirmation, transfer all confirmation-relevant items and
enter the following data:
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Maintain Service Processes
Open ( ) the service order that you created in one of the previous exercises
Choose Create Follow-Up Transaction ( ).
Choose Service Confirmation Confirmation.
On the Item Selection tab choose Select All ( ).
Choose the button Copy.
Change the order quantity of the repair item to 1 AU.
Go to the Fast Entry data and change the Exec. Service Employee to Windham (BP
number 400440).
Set the status to Complete.
Save the confirmation.
PC UI:
Choose Service Processing Service Orders.
Open the service order that you created in one of the previous exercises.
If necessary, choose Go To List either to list your favorites or use the advancedsearch.
Choose Follow-Up Activity Create Confirmation Confirmation.
Choose Transfer All .
Change the order quantity of the repair item to 1 AU.
Choose tab General Data.
Service Employee: Windham (BP number 400440)
Choose Service Status Complete Items.
Choose Save.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 247/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-89
5-1-4 In customizing (of the ERP system) check the integration settings relevant for the Cross-
Application Time Sheet (CATS).
Which ERP data entry profile is used for service confirmations transferred from SAPCRM?
SAP GUI:
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Integration with Other mySAP.comComponents Customer Relationship Management Settings for Service
Processing Time Sheet Integration Assign Data Entry Profile
Optionally you can
1. use the following path in CRM Customizing:
SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship
Management Transactions Settings for Service
Processes Integration Set Up Time Sheet and
Controlling Integration
2. use transaction code /nSCRM in the ERP system.
Data Entry Profile: ISP_SM.
Which activity types are derived for the confirmation item repair and for the driving
time?
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Integration with Other mySAP.com
Components Customer Relationship Management Settings for Service
Processing Define Derivation of Attendance Type, Activity Type and Cost Element
The activity type for the repair item is 1410.
The activity type for the driving time is 1418.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 248/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-90
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 249/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-91
Solutions
Unit: Service Order Management
Topic: Billing
6-1 Standard CRM service processes are CRM billing-relevant. Create a billing document inthe CRM system and check for successful ERP transfer.
6-1-1 Maintain the billing due list and create a billing document for the service confirmation
your created earlier.
Can you explain the billing value of the repair item if you compare it with the serviceconfirmation?
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Billing Maintain Billing Due List
Document Number: <Your service confirmation number>
Choose Execute ( ).
Expand ( ) the line item corresponding to your confirmation.
The billing value of the repair item can be derived from the order quantity and the sales price of this product.
The actual duration of the repair will be posted to CATS but the order quantity is
relevant for billing.
Mark the line item (top level) the corresponds to your confirmation.
Choose Individual Billing ( ).
Choose Save.
PC UI:
Choose Billing Billing Due List .
Choose Show Advanced Search.
Document Number: <Your service confirmation number>
Choose Go.
Mark the line item corresponding to your confirmation and choose Go To Details.
The billing value of the repair item can be derived from the order quantity and the sales
price of this product.
The actual duration of the repair will be posted to CATS but the order quantity is
relevant for billing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 250/439
© SAP AG CR700 6-92
Choose Go To List .
Choose Individual Billing Doc.
6-1-2 Check the document flow of the billing document. Do you see accounting documents?
SAP GUI:
Right-click on the processed list item and choose Display Billing Document .
The tab Doc. Flow contains an entry Accounting document.
The document(s) can be displayed using ( ).
PC UI:
Choose Go To Details.
Choose tab Document Flow.
Navigate to the Billing Document via hyperlink.
Choose tab Document Flow.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 251/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-1
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 252/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-2
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of product service letter management
Create a product service letter
Perform Customizing for product service letters
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 253/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-3
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter
The product service letter (PSL) is an official document issued bythe manufacturer (usually) documenting a service
directive/request for a certain range of products and the
conditions of the service to be performed
The reason for issuing a service letter is usually either a potential
or identified technical failure and/or avoiding costly correction
measures of the product
Product Service Letter
Different types of PSL• Safety PSL (Call-Back / Recalls)
- Safety hazard
- As soon as possible
- Does not expire, no end-date
- In most countries a legal requirement. Often monitored by legal authorities. Consumer protection.
- Owner of equipment will be contacted
- Full reimbursement from manufacturer is normal
• Commercial PSL
- To eliminate potential failure to prevent costly correction measures
- From as-soon-as-possible up to an end-date
- Reimbursement ranging from full claimable up to clearly defined limits between Manufacturer –
Dealer and Customer
• Support PSL’s (often called Service Bulletins)
- Frequent problems discovered by the manufacturer can lead to a PSL
- Is not mandatory
- Are chargeable after warranty has expired
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 254/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-4
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of mySAP CRM Product Service LetterManagement
Create a product service letter
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 255/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-5
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter Process (PSL)
Note: Numbers correspond to chapters
OEM determines a
PSL is required
1Product Service
Letter Processing
3
PSL is assigned to Service
Order for customer ind.
Object
Set Amount
Allocation andBill Partners
6
5
Change status of PSL
and inform OEM
2
Service Provider Receives
PSL and inform customers
7
Analyze PSL 4
Service Order with
PSL is carried out and
confirmed
The OEM determines that a product improvement is needed for one of its products and creates a ProductService Letter that is sent to the dealers and service providers. The OEM sends information regarding
the tasks, parts, and tools required for the PSL.
The dealer receives the PSL and updates his service system with the information. The additional
information regarding the tasks, parts, and tools is created as a Service Template. The Service Template
is linked to the PSL. The dealer then informs the customers if necessary.
When a customer orders service for an equipment where a valid PSL exist the system determines open
service letters and/or the service manager enhances the service order with a PSL relevant task
The service employee performs the service and performs confirmation for the work done, materials used
etc.
The confirmation status of the PSL of a specific object is changed and the OEM is informed that the
PSL has been carried out for this individual object
Setting the Amount Allocation the service manager defines who has to pay which part of the PSL task
and bills the relevant partners
The service manager performs analyzes of the PSL processing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 256/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-6
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter Management
Solution covering the Dealer/Serviceprovider operational side of the PSLmanagement
Automatic load of PSL’s including ServiceTemplate to store the details regarding theactivities to be carried out
Manual creation of PSL and ServiceTemplate and link of these
Search for affected products (individualobjects) when creating a PSL
Search for valid PSL‘s when referencing
an ind. Object in the service order Amount allocation and Billing/Claiming
Product Service Letter Management
Product Service Letter Management (Operations)• OEM Support
- Support for an OEM to maintain, distribute and analyze PSL‘s.
- Distribute to other partners (and systems).
- Enable the OEM to generate the necessary report for various authorities and organizations.
• Multi-tier Support
- OEM distributes the PSL‘s to Dealers and Service Providers. The Dealers and Service Providers
can then again distribute it within their organization or region.
• Dealer/Service Provider support
- Electronically receive PSL‘s.
- Electronically send PSL status to issuer.
- Support for a Dealer / Service provider to maintain, distribute and analyze their own PSL’s. This
is especially interesting when a Dealer/Service provider has his own product range.
• …
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 257/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-7
• …
• High level description of the PSL
- Reason, affected products and/or ranges of products, validities, severity.
- General descriptions such as problem description, solution approach, and activities to be taken.
• Detailed description of PSL
- Detailed execution instructions of the tasks to carry out, parts and tools required.
- Service Templates are ‘execution ready’ documents used to speed up the order planning and
execution process.
• Claim Integration
- The execution efforts (costs) are normally claimable to the manufacturer. Reimbursement rules
may cover a split of the costs ( amount allocation) between different parties like manufacturer,
dealer, insurance company, customer, etc.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 258/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-8
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter – Basic Architecture
Issuer (e.g. Manufacturer)
Executor
(e.g. Service
Provider, Dealer)
Service Order
PSL Confirmation
PSL Confirmation
Product Service Letter
Manufacturer
Product Service Letter
Dealer Site
Distribution PSL
Confirmation PSL
to issuer
Confirmation PSL
from Order
Billing/Claim(Dealer)
Invoice
receipt(Manufacturer)
Level Product Service Letter
Management
Service Order
Management
Invoicing
Communication to Customer
Definition
(Create)
Identification
(Check)
Execution and
Confirmation (Order)
Amount
Allocation /
Settlement
Analytics
Confirmation
PSL (Issuer)
Invoicereceipt
(other partners)
4
6
3
1
27
5
The issuer puts out a product service letter. The system looks for applicable objects owned by customersand creates a line item for each. The issuer distributes the product service letter to dealers.
You inform customers with the corresponding individual objects about the service actions to be
performed that are contained in the product service letter.
Service orders are created to do the work needed are created from the PSL. This could be automatic.
The work items are copied from a service template that is assigned to the PSL into the service order.
The service order is confirmed. The status of the service order is changed.
The PSL line item is confirmed (status is changed) and the confirmation that it is done is communicated
to the issuer.
Billing can be done according to appropriate splits through amount allocation. Contract terms or
warranty can be taken into account. Analysis is available.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 259/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-9
SAP AG 2004
Product Service Letter Customizing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Perform the customizing settings for service process
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 260/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-10
SAP AG 2004
Different settings according
to business transaction category
Additional business transaction categories
Dependent of leading business transaction category
Customizing at header level:
Assign business transaction categories
Transaction attributes and characteristics:Controlling attributes
Leading business transaction category
Define transaction type:
Product Service Letter Customizing: Header
The standard transaction type for product service letter transaction is PSLH . You can define your owntransaction types in Customizing. For each transaction type, you can define the different attributes that
are required for a business process.
Each transaction type is assigned to a leading business transaction category. PSLH has the leading
business transaction category BUS2000210 (Product Service Letter) . It also contains the business
transaction categories BUS2000116 (Service Process) and BUS2000126 (Business Activity).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 261/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-11
SAP AG 2004
Subject Profile
Partner Determination Procedure
Object Reference Profile
Action Profile
Date Profile
Product Service Letter Associated Profiles
The subject profile is assigned in the Service business transaction category at the customizing headerlevel. There is a standard subject profile PSLH. To view or make changes to the subject profile use
the customizing transaction: CRM > Basic Functions > Catalogs, Codes and Profiles > Define Subject
Profiles .
Standard partner determination procedure: PSLH0001 Product Service Letter Header with the partner
functions: 03 (Bill-to-Party (CRM)) and 04 (Payer (CRM)) .
The standard Object Reference Profile for PSLH is TEMPLATE. The customizing for this setting is
found in CRM > Transactions > Settings for Product Service Letters > Define Object Reference Profile.Multiple relationships allowed must not be selected. This object reference profile gives me a place to
associate a service order template for repairs initiated by the PSL. The template attached here will
default into any service order created from an action in the PSL item.
PSL_H action profile is assigned to transaction type PSLH.
PSL_HEADER date profile is assigned to transaction type PSLH. This profile contains two important
date types: VALIDFROM (Valid From) and VALIDTO (Valid To) as well as the duration:
EST_SRV_TIME (Estimated Working Time).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 262/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-12
SAP AG 2004
Different settings according to business
transaction category
Assign business transaction categories
Only certain combinations are permitted
Customizing at item level:
Assign business transaction categories:
Item attributes and characteristics:Controlling attributes
Item object type
Define item category:
Product Service Letter Customizing: Item
The predefined item category for PSLH is PSLI.
Item object type: BUS2000178 (ProductServLetterConfirmationItem CRM)
Usage of individual object: 1 (Item contains product or individual object)
Customizing path: CRM → Transactions → Basic Settings → Define Item Categories
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 263/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-13
SAP AG 2004
At the transaction type level for PSLH
PSL_H contains actions to find the objectswhich are the focus of the PSL
At the item category level for PSLI
PSL_I has an action to create service orders
automatically for each item on the PSL
For integration in the service order:
SERVICE_ORDER has an action
CREATE_ITEMS_FOR_PSL
SERVICE_ORDER_ITEM has an action to
complete items on the PSL
Actions in the PSL
PSL_H attaches to the transaction type for the PSL. It contains two actions (one manual and oneautomatic) which are designed to find all unique objects that fit the description of the product and
identifier entered in the PSL by checking the installed base for applicable individual objects using the
validity and the product range that you defined in the header of the product service letter. The system
creates a separate PSL item for each individual object. If the system does not find any applicable
individual objects for the specified validity and product range, it does not create PSL items. It also only
creates PSL items for the applicable individual objects that do not already have a PSL item.
PSL_I attaches to the item category for the PSL. It contains an action to create service orders
automatically for each reference object associated with the PSL. This action creates a service order with
one or more item(s) for each selected PSL item. If a service order template is assigned to the header of
the product service letter, the system uses the content of the template to create the service order items. If
no service order template is assigned to the product service letter, the system uses the default service
product defined for the action in Customizing as well as the estimated working time defined in theheader of the product service letter to create one service order item.
If you prefer to wait until the service order is created and then search for any relevant PSLs to the
reference object on the service order, then use the action CREATE_ITEMS_FOR_PSL in the action profile SERVICE_ORDER which can be tied to the service order header. This action will check for
applicable product service letters for a service order. You can select the product service letters found by
the system and include them in your service order. In the service order, the system creates service items
with information from the product service letter.
...
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 264/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-14
…
The service order items can have the action profile SERVICE_ORDER_ITEM which contains an action
to complete items on the PSL when service order items relating to the PSL are confirmed. In this
manner, the issuer can stay informed as to which items on the PSL have been completed.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 265/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-15
SAP AG 2004
Service Order Templates are often
used with Product Service Letters
Contains service work steps detailing
necessary actions for the PSL
Reusable
Automatically included in service orders
associated with the PSL
Service Templates Customizing
SRVT transaction type
Template Type = D (without doc flow)
Service Order Templates
Service Templates Transaction type for service templates is SRVT. It contains the following settings:
Template type D – without document flow. If you use this setting, you can use a business transaction as
a template. The type (B - D) defines whether the relationship data for the follow-up transaction is also
written by the system.
Partner determination procedure used is 042. You use this partner determination procedure to determine
which partners are involved in this business process. No sold-to parties exist in the service order
template.
Organizational data profile used is 024. The organizational data profile for the service order template
does not contain any data, since templates do not need to be checked. You enter the data you require in
the service order template manually.
When using a service template with a PSL: Make sure that the template is released and valid.
The system automatically inserts the required data for the selected service order template in the business
transaction. You can add to or change this data.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 266/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-16
SAP AG 2004
In the PSL, a user can choose which
alternate identifier to use with the
product ID.
You do not need to specify a profile for
alternate identifiers in the PSL transaction
type.
Instead a user may an alternate ID when
creating the PSL.
An action at the header level of the PSL will
search for all items identified by the product
number and the alternate ID range given.
Define ID types in the IMG or use the standardprovided.
Alternate Identifiers in the PSL
As of CRM Release 4.0, alternative ID types can be defined in the product master and used in business processes instead of the product ID. Alternative IDs therefore allow you to use an identification in your
business processes that conforms to industry standards.
Alternate ID’s are used in the PSL to find the unique instances of the products needing attention on the
PSL. The user will specify an alternate ID and a product, then an action on the transaction header will
be used to search for all products that meet the specifications of the combined search of product ID and
alternate ID. For example, the PSL may pertain to a product with manufacturer serial numbers 1-100.
Then the alternate ID of manuf. serial number with a range of 1-100 will be chosen by the user in
addition to the product ID.
Alternate ID types are set up in the IMG under Cross-Application Components → SAP Products →
Alternative Product IDs.
Alternate ID types may also be associated to object families so that they may be used to identifyindividual objects.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 267/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 268/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-18
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 269/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-19
Exercises
Unit: Product Service Letter
Topic: Create a Product Service Letter
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a Product Service Letter (PSL)
• Create Service Order Items based on PSL’s
Since this was the 34th
repair ticket the technician has received
for the same LCD problem over the past few weeks, he decides todiscuss the issue with some of the other Service Technicians who
have worked on the problem. After a number of discussions withhis colleagues as well as with the Manufacturer, the technicianconcludes that this is a manufacturing defect and that all
remaining stock needs to be cleared off the shelves. Also,
customers who have purchased the Notebook Professional 17 inthe past 6 months need to be notified of the problem. He uses the
Product Service Letter to identify who these customers are via the
Registered Product Number (Individual Object) and then to createan automatic service order for follow-up with these customers.
1-1 Create a product service letter.
1-1-1 Create a product service letter of type SAP Prod.Serv.Letter and enter the
following data:
Bill-to Party: Service US (400410)
Description: ##LCD Display
Priority: Medium
1-1-2 Identify the product and ID type that are the subject of the product serviceletter. Enter the information.
Product-ID: HT-1011 ID Type: Product ID
You could specify a range if you so choose, but for purposes of this exercise,you will leave these fields blank.
1-1-3 Release the PSL.
1-1-4 Enter an action at the header level to find all the items identified by the product
ID and ID type. Use the action PSL_CREATE_ITEMS .
1-1-5 Attach the Service Order Template 200270.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 270/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 271/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-21
Solutions
Unit: Product Service Letter
Topic: Create a Product Service Letter
1-1 Create a product service letter.
1-1-1 Create a product service letter of type SAP Prod.Serv.Letter and enter the
following data:
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Maintain Product Service Letters
Business Transaction Create
Choose Prod. Service Letter SAP Prod. Serv. Letter.
Enter the following:
Description: ##LCD Display
Bill-to Party: Service US (400410)
Priority: Medium
PC UI:
Service Processing→ Product Service Letters.
Choose New SAP Product Service Letter .
Bill-to Party: Service US (400410)
Priority: Medium
Description: ##LCD Display
1-1-2 Identify the product and ID type that are the subject of the product serviceletter. Enter the information.
SAP GUI:
Enter the product ID and ID type on the Fast Entry screen.
PC UI:
On the General Data tab, choose the Add Entry button in the Product Section
near the bottom of the screen. Enter the product ID and ID type.
You could specify a range if you so choose, but for purposes of this exercise,you will leave these fields blank.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 272/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-22
1-1-3 Release the PSL.
SAP GUI:
At the header level, change the status to Released using the dropdown menu.
PC UI:
Choose the Service Status button, then choose Release from the drop down
menu. At the header level, select the Release button.
1-1-4 Enter an action at the header level to find all the items identified by the product
ID and ID type.
SAP GUI:
Use the Actions icon. Choose the action PSL_CREATE_ITEMS from the drop
down list.
All Product ID’s (Individual Objects) associated with the product HT-1011 will
be gathered up and listed on the Items Tab. Select the Items tab to view all theProduct ID’s associated with the product HT-1011.
PC UI:
Choose the Scheduled Actions button and the action PSL_CREATE_ITEMS .
All Product ID’s (Individual Objects) associated with the product HT-1011 will
be gathered up and listed on the Objects Tab. Select the Objects tab to view allthe Product ID’s associated with the product HT-1011.
1-1-5 Attach the Service Order Template 200270.
The template is used to automatically copy in data to service orders. In the next
steps, we will trigger an action that will automatically create service orders for
each of the Product ID’s in the service letter and in these generated service
orders, the data from the template will automatically be copied in.
SAP GUI:
Go to Transaction Data. Select the Relationships tab and enter the Service
order template 200270.
PC UI:
Go to the Relationships section on the General Data tab. Choose Template inthe Related Object field and add the transaction number 200270 in the
Transaction ID field.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 273/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 274/439
© SAP AG CR700 7-24
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 275/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-1
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 276/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 277/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the options for complaints handling Describe the options for returns processing
Perform Customizing settings for complaints and returns
Complaints and Returns: Unit Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 278/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-4
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns: Business Scenario
The customer expects appropriate action if there are
defective products or deficient services.
Customers use the Internet, telephone, e-mail, or fax
to report that they are not satisfied with the goods
or services they have received.
The actions may include returning an item, sending
a replacement, giving credit, or other options.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 279/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-5
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Processing: TopicObjectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Create and process complaints Create and process returns
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 280/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-6
SAP AG 2004
ComplaintWhen a customer has issues with a material or service provided
Return
When a customer wishes to return a material he has received
Two documents to handle customer satisfaction
Both documents provide:
Easy entry for documenting defects and causes
Flexible process definition for actions that can be chosen manually orset to occur automatically.
Integration with delivery processing, accounting, quality management
and business intelligence
Two Options: Complaints and Returns
Features of the Complaint and Return documents: Actions can occur automatically or can be triggered by the user clicking a pushbutton to launch follow-
on documents to handle sending a replacement, creating a return, creating a credit memo, and specifying
other logical next steps.
Automatic business partner determination and data display
Catalog types allowing flexible definition of information for capture and analysis
Reason for rejection and reason for complaint
Linking of attachments, such as Microsoft Office documents for full details
Integrated with the Interaction Center so that an agent can quickly view prior transactions with
customers, create complaints or replacements as follow-on transactions, and view status of outstanding
complaints.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 281/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-7
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Management
Create complaint
for product andservice
4
2 3
5
1
6
Return defective
product
Complaints and Returns
Management
Create substitute
delivery
Create credit
memo for
service
Analyze complaint
reasons and successof actions taken
Check customer
satisfaction
The customer calls the service organization to complain about a service performed and a defective product that was delivered.
The customer sends in the defective product using the return material authorization number issued.
A service employee performs a technical analysis and decides that the customer should be given a
replacement for the defective product.
The service employee also decides that the customer should be compensated with a credit for the
incomplete service performed.
Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager analyzes complaint reasons and decides what
actions should be taken to prevent further complaints and checks whether the actions taken and product
changes were successful.
The agent calls the customer to ensure that the customer is satisfied.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 282/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-8
SAP AG 2004
Complaints Process
Complaint
item
Return
request
Credit/debit
request
Customer-specific
actions
Sub-items
ERP
CRM
Billing
Substitute
delivery
Task
Complaint Quality
notification
Creation of Complaints You can create complaints with or without reference to a sales transaction or a service process.
If you want to create a complaint document with reference to a preceding document, call this document
up and use Create Follow-Up Transaction to create a complaint document.
Items are only copied if they have a valid status.
Then specify the reason or reasons for the complaint. The fields Defect Class and Quality Defect are
automatically filled according to the settings in Customizing. The number of defects is set to “1” by
default. You can overwrite the values for the number of defects and quality defects.
From the complaint, you can use actions to generate items such as credit and debit memo request items
(these are created in the complaints document as sub-items), CRM documents such as activities, or
documents in SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) such as repair orders. Sub-items can be created by actions triggered either manually or by the system, based on predefined
planning and start conditions.
If you set the complaint document to the status Completed , all sub-items are automatically set to thestatus Completed .
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 283/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-9
SAP AG 2004
Returns Process
Return
item Credit/debit
request
Spare part
delivery
Customer-specific
actions
Sub-items CRM document
ERP
CRM
Billing
Return
Task
The process begins when returned goods are received or a customer asks to return goods. The employee creates a return in the CRM system. This can be done with or without reference to an
existing document. A returns item can be made by copying from the preceding document.
Customer data is entered at the header and additional business partners are determined using partner
determination.
A returns order is generated in the ERP system when a returns item is created in the CRM system. The
number of the ERP sales order and the number of the CRM return is the same. A goods receipt can be
posted in ERP to this sales order.
As with the complaint, an employee enters a reason from predefined codes.
Activities can be triggered such as a credit memo, a spare parts delivery, or a customer-specific action.
A credit memo transfers billing relevant items to CRM Billing.
A spare part delivery sales order is created in the ERP system if spare part delivery is chosen.
Employees can also create tasks which may be assigned to another employee to complete.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 284/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-10
SAP AG 2004
Examples of Standard Actions
Create return request
A return request item is replicated to the ERP
system for goods receipt processing.
Create spare part delivery
A delivery line item is replicated to the ERP system
to create a delivery document.
Create quality notification
A quality notification is generated in the ERP system.
Create credit/debit memo request
The credit/debit memo request is created and transferred to the CRM
Billing.
Create task
A CRM task is created and appears in the task list of the responsible
employee.
Credit and Debit Memos are created in CRM Billing and the relevant controlling objects are created. Returns Requests - Depending on the indicator in Activate System Configuration for Service Parts
Management , the replication occurs as follows:
• If this indicator is not set, the returns item is replicated in a sales order; in other words, a sales order
with a corresponding returns item is automatically created. The returns item gets the same number
and same item category as the document and item in SAP CRM. You create a returns delivery for
the returns item. When the product is returned, create a goods receipt for the returned item. The
goods receipt triggers accounts receivable and posting to the controlling object in SAP ECC.
• If this indicator is set, the returns item is replicated in a delivery; in other words, a delivery with a
corresponding returns item is automatically created. Each delivery item gets an additional returns
material authorization (RMA) number, which is created by putting together the numbers of the
returns document and the returns item in SAP CRM. You can find this indicator in CRM
Customizing under CRM → Transactions → Basic Settings → Activate System Configuration for
Service Parts Management .
Spare parts delivery automatically creates a sales order in the SAP ECC to which a delivery and goods
issue can be posted. The sales order contains the same number and item category as the document in
CRM.
A quality notification can be created from the complaint header or line item and is integrated with the
assigned ERP system. Quality notifications are often used for internal processes, such as stopping
outbound deliveries, or for external processes such as informing suppliers that goods should be returned.
The ultimate goal is to introduce processes to improve the quality of the product.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 285/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-11
SAP AG 2004
Additional Complaint and Return Functions
Reference Documents
Reference ObjectsSerial Number Identification
Warranty Determination
Quantity Check
Investigation
Return Material Authorization
Reference Documents -You can create a complaint or return with or without reference to a CRMdocument, for example, a sales order, service order, or billing document or to any document residing in
an integrated system, for example, billing or delivery documents in SAP ERP.
Reference Objects - In complaints and returns, you can provide additional information about the product
or service that is the subject of the complaint by creating a reference to objects from a header or item.
Warranty Check - An automatic check determines whether a warranty exists for customer-specific
objects.
Quantity check - An automatic check prevents the entry of complaints for more products or services
than have actually been sold to a customer.
Investigation – The system can use the automatic execution of business rules to automatically decline or
release complaints or returns. If the situation is unclear, then an investigation can be triggered by
workflow.
Return material authorization (RMA) – A returns authorization item that contains the data for the
physical return is created for the returns request item. The number of the return or complaint, together
with the number of the sub-item, results in the unique returns material authorization (RMA) number.
By an action triggered in the complaint/return, you can generate a returns authorization item that
contains the data for the physical return whcih can be replicated into your logistics system.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 286/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-12
SAP AG 2004
Reference Documents
A Complaint or Return can be created:
With or without reference to an existing document.
With reference to existing CRM documents
Sales orders
Service orders
CRM billing documents
Product service letters
More than one CRM invoice
(only within a mass controlling scenario)
The selected items are copied into the complaint document
according to copying rules and the document flow is updated. A BAdI is provided to reference other external documents, for
example, billing or delivery documents in ERP.
When you reference items, the selected items from the reference document are copied into thecomplaint/return document according to the defined copying rules.
You can add information to an existing complaint document by creating a reference to one or more
documents. You can also create a reference on item level.
When using the BAdI, the copy logic is not provided neither for items data nor for pricing.
To reference to more than one CRM Billing document is only possible when using a mass controlling
scenario.
Line item reference per invoice
The BAdI is: CRM_COPY_BADI_EXT
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 287/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-13
SAP AG 2004
Reference Objects and Serial Number Integration
The complaints and returns scenario supports reference object
determination based on entered serial numbers.
Enabling you to identify problems that are dependent on the IBase inwhich the product is installed.
Objects can be products, installed bases (IBases) and their
components, individual objects, or serial numbers.
Enter either an IBase component or an individual object or
a product with the relevant serial number.
Depending on the assigned serial-number scenarios within the
product master, the system validates the entered serial numbers and
determines the corresponding individual object.
SN 103873757
Reference Objects - In complaints and returns, you can provide additional information about the
product or service that is the subject of the complaint by creating a reference to objects from a header or
item.
• You can create a reference to products, installed bases (IBases) and their components, or individual
objects.
• Information about the relationship between a product and an IBase enables you, for example, to
analyze complaints to identify problems that are dependent on the IBase in which a product isinstalled.
You can enter serial numbers for products and service parts within the context of complaints, returns,
and in-house repair orders. The serial numbers specified can be validated and in the interest of logistics
integration, replicated to SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC).
The serial number information indicates whether a serial numbers are relevant for a certain product, and
how validation of a serial number entered in a document should occur.
You can use SAP GUI for Windows or People-Centric UI to enter serial number information in SAP
CRM in the product master on the Material tab page.
You can also get the serial number information by replicating the material master data from SAP ECC
to SAP CRM (function CRS_SERIAL_PROFIL_DETERMINE). A material is serial number-relevant if
a serial number profile is defined on plant level.
In SAP CRM, you can overwrite this replicated information.
The serial number information is replicated from SAP CRM to the mobile client as part of the product
master data.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 288/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-14
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Determination
Automatically performed for customer objects
Checks individual objects or installed base
components
Quantity Check for Referenced
Complaint/Return items
Automatic check prevents the entry of more
products and services than were sold
A maximum quantity is displayed.
Choice of an error or warning message for
increasing the maximum quantity.
Warranty Determination and Quantity Check
Warranty Check• An automatic check determines whether a warranty exists for customer-specific objects.
• You can use warranty information to make decisions about subsequent actions that need to be taken.For example you might want the system to automatically create a return item if a warranty exists.
• The warranty check is based on:
- Maintained warranty conditions for the individual object or installed base component
- Manually maintained delivery date
Check against original quantities for referenced documents.
• An automatic check prevents the entry of complaints for more products or services than have actually
been sold to a customer.
• For new complaint or return items, the system also displays the maximum quantity of a product or
service that can be entered.
• You can define whether the user should get an error or information message when increasing the
maximum quantity displayed.
• Prerequisite is a reference to a service order, sales order, or billing document.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 289/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-15
SAP AG 2004
Investigation
Create Provide Approve Final approval
#
Item is approved (by system or manual investigator).
Item is rejected (by system or manual investigator).
Item is set to “manual investigation” by the system.
Prod A Pricing
Prod B Shortage
Prod C Overage
#
Only items with status
“manual investigation”
have to be processed
Prod A Pricing
Prod B Shortage
Prod C Overage
ComplaintComplaint
Customer Researcher Analyst Approver
The system can use the automatic execution of business rules to automatically decline or release complaintsor returns.. If the circumstances are unclear according to defined criteria, or if automatic processing should
not take place for certain defined criteria, the document is transferred to a workflow for investigations. The
system determines the employees responsible and forwards the document to them.
An investigation allows you to filter out critical documents such as complaints, returns, or used part
returns, and process them at the research, analysis, and approval processing levels. The end result is that
the documents are approved or declined.
This slide shows you the more detailed sequence of the manual investigation process:
First of all, the customer creates a complaint with three complaint items for product A, product B, and
product C. The system validates the complaint items. In the example, the system approves the complaint
item for product C, rejects the complaint item for product B, and determines that the complaint item for
product A has to be investigated manually.
Only items with manual investigation status have to be processed and will be forwarded to a researcher.
The researcher is responsible for providing additional information for manually investigating Product A,
but is not allowed to approve an item. The analyst approves the manual investigation item, based on
information provided by the researcher.
The approver then sets the final approval, which updates the status of the complaint item for Product A.
The system determines the manual approval process and the partners involved (researcher, analyst,
approver) for complaint item product A.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 290/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-16
SAP AG 2004
Return Material Authorization (RMA)
RMA required for processing returns
Each return process requires:
An authorization check for returning a sold product
A unique RMA number for the return delivery
Unique Numbering
CRM complaints and returns create unique document numbers.
Document number plus sub-item results in a unique RMA number.
These numbers are replicated to the ERP system.
Returns Authorization Attachment
Additionally, a return authorization document can be created withdata for the physical return.
This returns authorization is triggered by actions.
It contains the physical quantity expected.
Return material authorization (RMA)
• Each return process requires: an authorization check for returning a sold product and a unique RMA
number for the return delivery.
• Authorization checking is supported by a warranty check and a reference to an existing CRM sales
order.
• The unique CRM complaint/return number, which is also available in SAP ECC / SAP R/3, supports
the RMA number
• A returns authorization item that contains the data for the physical return is created for the returns
request item.
• The number of the return or complaint, together with the number of the sub-item, results in the
unique returns material authorization (RMA) number.
• The order quantity of the returns authorization item is determined as follows: The system copies the
approved quantity from the returns request item into the Quantity field of the returns authorization
item. This quantity is the order quantity, which you can change if necessary.
• Within a complaint with reference to a billing document, if the returns authorization item has an
invoice correction, an invoice correction request item is also created as a sub-item for the returns
authorization item.
• …
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 291/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 292/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-18
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns Customizing:Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Perform the customizing settings for complaints and returns
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 293/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-19
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns: Customizing
Standard transaction types:
CRMC – Complaints
CRMR – Returns
TSC – Sales Complaints
Standard item categories:
COMP – Complaint
G2N – Credit Memo
L2N – Debit Memo
TANN – Free of Charge Subsequent Delivery
CRMR – Returns
Item category determination for sub-items
The transaction types and item categories for complaints and repairs are predefined as follows in thestandard system:
CRMC Complaint Transaction Type
COMP (Complaints) – this item category is used as the main item
L2N (Debit memo request) – this sub-item is triggered by an action
G2N (Credit memo request) - this sub-item is triggered by an action
TANN (Free of charge substitute delivery) – this sub-item is triggered by an action
REN – (Returns request) – this sub-item is triggered by an action
The item category for the sub-items is determined by the transaction type, the item category group (from
the product master), the usage (from the action definition), and the main item category.
If the settings for these Customizing objects do not meet your business requirements, you can copy the
objects and change them.
IMG: Customer Relationship Management → Business Transactions → Basic Settings → Define
Transaction Types.
Make the following settings for delivery-relevant items: On the Definition of Item Categories screen: In
field Assign BW/CO: Sales, On the Customizing Item screen: In field Bill. Relevance: External billing
If you want to create complaints with reference to a service process or sales transaction, you must define
this in Copy Control in Customizing.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 294/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-20
SAP AG 2004
Processing Medium Methods Workflow
Smart Form
You can set up actions in Customizingaccording to the demands of your
company’s processes.
Actions can schedule and start follow-on processing
steps, depending on transaction type and different
schedule and start conditions.
Action profiles control this process.
Customizing Actions
active
inactive
Start Condition
Action Profile
Action
Schedule
Condition
Schedule
Automatically
Action List
F4 (manually)
Toolbar (manually)
Processing Time immediately
when saving
selection report
yes
no
fulfilled
fulfilled
In Action customizing, you can do the following:• Create an action profile with action definitions
• Define the attributes of the actions in the action definitions, such as the processing time or whetherthe action may be changed in the document
• Define conditions (schedule and start conditions) for action types
• Assign the action profile to the relevant transaction type and item category
Action profiles COMPLAINT and COMPLAINT_ITEM are delivered by SAP. If they do not meet your
requirements, you can define your own actions.
COMPLAINT is assigned to transaction type CRMC for complaints, COMPLAINT_ITEM is assigned to
item category COMP . A Wizard in Customizing helps you create action profiles and actions.
For the SAP GUI, you can define labels and icons for the pushbuttons for each action within an action
profile. At this point, you can create pushbuttons only for actions to occur at the item level.
Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Settings for Complaints → Define Pushbuttons
for Actions
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 295/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-21
SAP AG 2004
Quality Notification Action Configuration
Quality Management (QM) Notification Integration
Based on action and on the fact the QM is setup in the backend
system.
Method: QM_NOTIFICATION
Initial value = Notification type (configuration in SAP ERP)
Quality notifications are created from the action containing the method QM_NOTIFICATION. You setthe initial value for the notification type which has been set up in the SAP ERP system.
The other parameters that can be passed are: RFC_DEST and TEXT_ID
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 296/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-22
SAP AG 2004
Subject Profile
The subject profile groups the catalog types and the valid code groups
The subject profile contains the hierarchy of the assigned catalogs
The subject profile is assigned to the transaction type
Customizing Catalogs
Subject
Return Reason
Cause
Task
Steps for setting up catalog customizing:• Define the relevant catalog types
• Define codes and code groups
• Define the code group profiles
• Define the subject profiles
• Assign the subject profile to the transaction type
• A defect class is assigned in Customizing for each code in code groups of the Damage/Reason
catalog type. When defining a defect class, you decide whether or not a defect of this class will be
flagged as a quality defect.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 297/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-23
SAP AG 2004
Customizing for Reference Documents (billing)
2. Create the reference type
(standard setting)
3. Assign business object typeto transaction type.
Reference document
configuration:
1. Set the transaction type to
be able to create with
reference:
Make this setting on the
Transaction details screen
(Creation with ref. is marked)
IMG→
CRM→
Transactions→
Basic Settings→
Define Transaction Type IMG → CRM → Transactions → Settings for Complaints → Integration → Business Add-Ins for
Document Referencing
1 = Set the transaction type to be able to create with reference.
2 = Define object types for document referencing
3 = Assign business object type to transaction type.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 298/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-24
SAP AG 2004
Complaints and Returns: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Describe the options for complaints handling
Describe the options for returns processing
Perform Customizing settings for complaints and returns
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 299/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-25
Exercises
Unit: Complaints and Returns
Topic: Complaints and Returns Processing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create and process complaints documents
• Create and process returns documents
Customers are complaining about products and services they
received from our company. You would like to create different
business transactions to document complaints and trigger follow-up transactions.
1-1 Create a complaint for one of your customers.
1-1-1 Create a complaint of type Complaints for your customer ##Megastore with veryhigh priority
If you receive a pop-up with contact persons, please choose one.
Enter the product R-1130 with quantity 1.
1-1-2 Create a return request as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
1-1-3 Create a credit memo as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
1-1-4 Create a Quality Notification sub-item using the action functionality on the itemlevel.
Save your business transaction.
Make a note of the business transaction number of your returns
2-1 ERP Integration. When the customer returns the item, a returns delivery will be created.
2-1-1 Create Returns Delivery (LR) for your complaint document using shipping point
3800
Post the goods receipt.
2-1-2 Check the Stock Overview of material R-1130 in plant 3800.
2-1-3 View the quality notification that was created in the SAP ERP system.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 300/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-26
3-1 Billing credit memo
3-1-1 Release List for Billing
In order to bill your credit memo item you have to release it for the billing due list.
3-1-2 Maintain billing due list
Enter the transaction number of your complaint and choose Execute.
Select your transaction and choose Individual Billing .
Choose Save.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 301/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-27
Solutions
Unit: Complaints and Returns
Topic: Complaints and Returns Processing
1-1 Create a complaint for one of your customers.
1-1-1 Create a complaint of type Complaints for your customer ##Megastore with very
high priority.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Maintain Complaints and In-House Repairs
Choose Business Transaction Create Choose Comlaints Complaints
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Description: ##Complaint
Priority: Very High
Product: R-1130
Quantity: 1
PC UI:
Choose Service and Support Complaints Choose New Complaints.
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Description: ##Complaint
Priority: Very High
If you receive a pop-up with contact persons, please choose a contact person.
On the Products tab choose Add Entry.
Product: R-1130
Quantity: 1
1-1-2 Create a return request as sub-item using the action functionality on item level.
SAP GUI:
Choose the button Returns Request .
PCUI:
Go to the Scheduled Action tab on item level.
Choose Add .
Select Returns Request
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 302/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-28
1-1-3 Create a credit memo as sub item using the action functionality on item level.
SAP GUI:
Choose the button Credit Memo.
PC UI:
Choose Scheduled Actions. Choose Add . Select Credit Memo
1-1-4 Create a Quality Notification sub-item using the action function on the item level.
SAP GUI:
Choose the action tab. Use the drop down to choose the action Quality
Notification.
PC UI:
Choose Scheduled Actions. Choose Add . Select Quality Notification.
Save.
2-1 ERP Integration. When the customer returns the item, a returns delivery will be created.
2-1-1 Create Returns Delivery.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Logistics Sales and Distribution Shipping and
Transportation Outbound Delivery Create Single Document with reference
to sales order
Shipping point: 3800
Selection data: today
Order: <your complaint number>
Delivery Type: LR
Choose ENTER.
Choose the button Post Goods Receipt .
PC UI:
Choose ERP Integration Create Outbound Delivery
Shipping point: 3800
Selection data: today
Order: <your complaint number>
Delivery Type: LR
Choose ENTER.
Choose the button Post Goods Receipt .
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 303/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-29
2-1-2 Check the Stock Overview of material R-1130 in plant 3800.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Logistics Materials Management Inventory Management
Environment Stock Stock Overview
Material: R-1130
Plant: 3800
Choose Execute.
Double click on the line with plant 3800.
Under Stock Type , you see the Returns line showing that the system has added your
returns request.
PC UI:
Choose ERP Integration Stock Overview
Material: R-1130
Plant: 3800
Choose Execute.
Double click on the line with plant 3800.
Under Stock Type , you see the Returns line showing that the system has added yourreturns request.
2-1-3 View the quality notification that was created in the SAP ERP system.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Logistics Quality Management Quality Notification
Display
Use the dropdown to search for your Notification number. Use the search by
Material and enter R-1130. Choose the notification with the description that
matches the description on your complaint.
PC UI:
Choose ERP Integration Display Quality Notification
Use the dropdown to search for your Notification number. Use the search by
Material and enter R-1130. Choose the notification with the description thatmatches the description on your complaint.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 304/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-30
3-1 Billing credit memo
3-1-1 Release List for Billing
In order to bill your credit memo you have to use the billing engine application.
SAP GUI:
In the CRM system, choose the menu path:
SAP Menu Service Billing Release Billing Due Lis
Document Number: <your complaint number>
Mark your complaint item and choose Release for Billing ( ).
PC UI:
Choose Billing Release for Billing
Choose Show Advanced Search
Document Number: <your complaint number>
Choose Go.
Mark your complaint item and choose Release Billing Block .
3-1-2 Maintain billing due list
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Billing Maintain Billing Due List
Document Number: <your complaint number>
Choose Execute.
Mark the line item and choose Individual Billing.
PC UI:
[Choose Billing Billing Due List ]
Choose Individual Billing Doc.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 305/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-31
Exercises
Unit: Complaint Processing
Topic: Complaints Customizing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a new complaint transaction type
• Create a new complaint item category
• Create a subject profile for damages
You would like to have a new set of damage codes to report on
problems found that you can use for your complaints.
1-1 Create a new subject profile for defect, cause and task codes.
1-1-1 Define a new code group for cause codes.
In the pop up, enter C2 in the catalog field.
Use the following values for the code group:
Code Group: ZCG## Description: Customer Damage ##
Status: Released
Use the following values for two new damage codes:
Code: Y##A
Description: Customer removed protective cover.
Code: Y##B
Description: Customer dropped object.
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 306/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-32
1-1-2 Define a code group profiles for causes.
Choose C2 Catalog.
Use the following values for your code group profile:
Code group profile: ZCGPC##
Code Group profile text Complaint ## Causes
Press Enter.
Choose your newly created code group profile. Choose whichever code groups you
would like to include for causes in your complaint transaction. Make sure toinclude your newly created Z## Code Group.
Save your entries.
1-1-3 Repeat this process to create a code group profile for damage.
Choose C Catalog.
Use the following values for your code group profile:
Code group profile: ZCGPD##
Code Group profile text Complaint ## Damage
Choose your newly created code group profile.
Choose whichever code groups you would like to include for causes in yourcomplaint transaction, such as PCcodes.
Save your entries.
1-1-4 Create a subject profile.
Use the following values for your subject profile:
Subject Profile: ZSP##
Subject Profile Category: Service
Text: ## Complaint Codes
Choose your newly created subject profile.
Use the following values:
Catalog C
Code Group Profile ZCGPD##
Level 1
Catalog C2
Code Group Profile ZCGPC##
Level 2
Catalog C3
Code Group Profile Complaint
Level 3
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 307/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-33
2-1 Create a new transaction type for complaints and adapt it so that it meets your
requirements. After completing the necessary customizing steps, test you new transactiontype.
2-1-1 In Customizing create a new transaction type YC## (##Complaint) by copying the
standard entry CRMC and make the following settings.
Transaction Type: YC##
Description (short): ##Complaint
Description (long): ## Complaint
2-1-2 Assign your newly created subject profile to your newly created transaction type.
2-1-3 Maintain item category determination. Mark all entries that are linked to the
standard transaction type CRMC with the item category group Standard item (NORM), copy and replace the transaction type with YC##.
Save your settings
2-1-4 Test your settings by creating a new complaint in either the PC UI or the SAP GUI.
Choose a damage code for your complaint and test that your new complainttransaction type uses your settings for code group subject profile.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 308/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-34
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 309/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-35
SolutionsR-
Unit: Complaints Processing
Topic: Complaints Customizing
1-1 Create a new subject profile for defect, cause and task codes.
1-1-1 Define a new code group for cause codes.
Architecture and Technology→ Configuration→ Customizing
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Settings for Complaints→ Settings for
Subjects→ Define Code Groups and Codes for Catalogs
In the pop up, enter C2 in the catalog field. Then continue.
New Entries
Use the following values for the code group:
Code Group: ZCG##
Description: Customer Damage ##
Status: Released
Press Enter . Choose your new code group. In the dialog structure on the left,double click on Codes.
New Entries
Use the following values for two new damage codes:
Code: Y##A
Description: Customer removed protective cover.
Code: Y##B
Description: Customer dropped object.
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 310/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-36
1-1-2 Define a code group profiles for causes.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Settings for Complaints→ Settings for
Subjects→ Define Code Groups Profiles
Choose C2 Catalog.
In the dialog structure on the left, double click on Definition of Code Groups Profile.
New Entries
Use the following values for your code group profile:
Code group profile: ZCGPC##
Code Group profile text Complaint ## Causes
Press Enter.
Choose your newly created code group profile. In the dialog structure on the left,double click on Code Groups for Profile.
New Entries
Choose whichever code groups you would like to include for causes in your
complaint transaction. Make sure to include your newly created Z## Code Group.
Save your entries.
Remain on this screen to do the following step.
1-1-3 Repeat this process to create a code group profile for damage.
In the dialog structure on the left, double click on Catalog .
Choose C Catalog.
In the dialog structure on the left, double click on Definition of Code Groups
Profile.
New Entries
Use the following values for your code group profile:
Code group profile: ZCGPD##
Code Group profile text Complaint ## Damage
Press Enter.
Choose your newly created code group profile. In the dialog structure on the left,
double click on Code Groups for Profile.
New Entries
Choose whichever code groups you would like to include for causes in your
complaint transaction, such as PCcodes.
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 311/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-37
1-1-4 Create a subject profile.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Settings for Complaints→ Settings for
Subjects→ Define Subject Profiles
New Entries
Use the following values for your subject profile:Subject Profile: ZSP##
Subject Profile Category: Service
Text: ## Complaint Codes
Choose your newly created subject profile. In the dialog structure on the left,
double click on Code Group Profile for Subject Profile.
New Entries
Use the following values:
Catalog CCode Group Profile ZCGPD##
Level 1
Catalog C2
Code Group Profile ZCGPC##
Level 2
Catalog C3
Code Group Profile Complaint
Level 3
Choose the line with the Code Group Profile for C2, and go down the level where it
shows code groups. Here you will be able to see the code groups you assigned tothis code group profile. (If you were to add a code group here, it would add those
codes to the code group profile.)
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 312/439
© SAP AG CR700 8-38
2-1 Create a new transaction type for complaints and adapt it so that it meets your
requirements. After completing the necessary customizing steps, test you new transactiontype.
2-1-1 In Customizing create a new transaction type YC## (##Complaint) by copying the
standard entry CRMC and make the following settings.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Transaction Types
Find and mark entry CRMC and press Copy As….
Transaction Type: YC##
Description (short): ##Complaint
Description (long): ## Complaint
Choose ENTER and confirm the Pop-Up.
2-1-2 Assign your newly created subject profile to your newly created transaction type.
Find and mark your newly created transaction type.
In the dialog structure on the left, double click on Assignment of Business
Transaction Categories.
Choose Service Process.
In the dialog structure on the left, double click on Customizing Header.
Subject Profile ZSP##
Save your entries.
2-1-3 Maintain item category determination. Mark all entries that are linked to thestandard transaction type CRMC with the item category group Standard item
(NORM), copy and replace the transaction type with YC##.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Category Determination
Mark all entries that start with CRMC with the item category group Standard item .
Choose Copy As…
Transaction Type: YC##
Choose Enter .
Repeat this step until you copied all marked entries.
Save your settings2-1-4 Test your settings by creating your new complaint transaction in either the PC UI or
the SAP GUI. Choose a damage code for your complaint and test that your newcomplaint transaction type uses your settings for code group subject profile.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 313/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-1
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 314/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-2
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair Processing
In-House Repair Customizing
In-House Repair
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 315/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-3
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the options for in-house repair processing
Create and manage an in-house repair order
Perform Customizing settings for in-house repair
In-House Repair: Unit Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 316/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-4
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Business Scenario
Manage the whole in-house repair process
from creation to cash:
Order Management - create in-house repair orders,
check whether warranty exists, define repair steps
and assign an existing service contract.
Engagement Management – plan repair costs,
manage quotation, record time and spare
parts used, and bill the client.
Logistics Integration – monitor and check
availability of required service parts, delivered
products to be repaired, and delivered
temporary replacements.
Controlling Integration – plan repair costs
and analyze costs and revenues resultingfrom the repair.
Escalation Management – monitor and escalate
existing in-house repair orders based on relevant
service level agreements.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 317/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-5
SAP AG 2004
In-house Repair Processing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Describe the options of in-house repair processing Create and manage an in-house repair order
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 318/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-6
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair
Analyze defect
reasons
Enter repair
request
7
4
23
5
1
8
6
Plan repair steps
Perform
confirmation
Send in defective
product
Create service
quotation
Create invoice Return repaired
product
The customer calls the service organization to request a repair. The agent enters the repair request. Thesystem checks whether a warranty exists.
The customer sends in the product using the given return material authorization number.
A service representative performs the technical analysis and enters the inspection result (causes, tasks,
etc.). He decides what action should be taken based on the inspection result.
The system calculates the price for the planned repair and required spare parts, according to the price
agreements in the service contract, and the warranty costs. The agent generates a service quotation.
The customer accepts the quotation. The service representative repairs the product and confirms his
working times and materials used. He also documents the inspection results.
The service representative returns the repaired product to the customer.
The service representative triggers customer billing, based on the confirmed time and spare parts used,and in accordance with existing warranties and specific price agreements.
Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager analyzes the most important defect reasons.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 319/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-7
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Order Structure
The In-House repair order is a document that covers all
relevant data for the whole in-house repair process,
starting from a repair request for a defect product or equipment for
a customer
planning of required repair steps and spare parts
all required follow-up steps (scrapping, return request, loaner
management)
In-House
Repair
Header
Main-Item
Sub-Item
Header Data• Information that is valid for the in-house repair order as a whole (for example, in-house repair order
number, status, description, priority, Sold-to Party)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 320/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-8
SAP AG 2004
Sales Order
In-House Repair
Repair StepsRepair Steps
Spare PartsSpare Parts
Return
Request
Scrapping
Return repaired
product request
Loan device
request
Sub-Items
Repair Steps
SAP R/3
Loan device
request
Goods issue
Return item
(Inbound)
Return repaired
product item
(Outbound)
Loan device item
(Inbound)
Loan device
Item (Outbound)
Spare Parts
Resource Planning
Reservation
Repair Request
Item
In-House
Repair
Order
Main-Items
Main Item Data• Contains information that is valid for specific in-house repair order item only (for example, the
product to be repaired, quantity, status, defect description, subject codes, counter reading ...)
Sub-item Data
• Contains information that is valid for the superior main item only (for example, required repair steps,
required service parts, delivery requests for loaner issues, scrapping, …)
• Sub-items can be created by triggering actions manually or by the system
Activities can be contacts or tasks. Task is 1003.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 321/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-9
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Item Hierarchy
Enables items within the service order, in-house repair order and
service confirmation to be structured in the form of a hierarchy
Used to show, for example, that certain spare parts belong to a
service or that a service consists of several individual services items
When you create a service order, you link the individual items to form a hierarchy by entering thenumber of the superior item in the field Higher-Level Item. As soon as you have maintained an higher-
level item, an additional tab Item Hierarchy is displayed, where the item hierarchy is represented
graphically.
When values from sub-items are cumulated, this value is assigned to the higher-level item
Group conditions can be defined for pricing. They define whether the system should calculate data for
pricing from more than one document item.
Pricing conditions can either be duplicated in all assigned sub-items or applied to the cumulated value of
all assigned sub-items.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 322/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-10
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Request
Sales Order
Return Item
(Inbound)
ERPMain-Item
Repair Request
Return Request
In-House
Repair
CRM
The customer reports (for example, to the Call Center) one or more
defect products.
He wants to return the defect products within the context of a service(for example, maintenance for monitors).
The agent enters the relevant information at header and main item
level
Business Partner Data
Reference Object
Product, quantity and defect description
Repairs are mainly reported in the Interaction Center or on the Internet (E-service). In some cases, a complaint precedes a repair order as a result of which the customer should send the
defective part in for repair.
When creating a repair request via an interaction center or web application, you or your customer is
allocated a uniquecan enter important document information about the repair, such as product, quantity,
and defect description.
The customer is allocated a unique returns material authorization (RMA) number which he or she can
use to send the product in for repair.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 323/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-11
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Goods Receipt
The customer records the RMA number on the delivery note.
When the returns arrived, the warehouse clerk
searches for the correct ERP sales order,
creates the return delivery and
post the goods receipt.
The quantity is posted into the order-specific stock, that the same
repaired product can be returned.
Delivery
Goods Receipt
Main-Item
Repair Request
Return Request
In-House
Repair
CRM
Sales Order
Return Item
ERP
When the return delivery is received in the service center, the warehouse clerk would search for thecorresponding ERP order which matches the RMA number given and create a return delivery with
reference.
The ability to create this delivery is controlled by the item category customizing of the return request
item.
The returned item will be posted into order-specific stock.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 324/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-12
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Diagnostic
Pos1Repair Request
Return Request
In-House Repair
CRM
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
Inspection result
recording
Repair step
planning
The sub-item Diagnostic
shows that the defects of
the receipt goods should
be analyzed.
This sub-item is a serviceitem represented by a
service product (assigned
in customizing).
Sales Order
Return Item
ERP
To record the result of the analysis you can• Select the correct cause codes from a predefined damage /cause group.
- Codes can be entered both at header and item level to describe or categorize the service order
subject, such as:
- Description (of problem, error, damage, ...)
- Cause (of problem, ...)
- Reason (for damage, rejection, complaint, inquiry, ...)
- Location (of damage, …)
- Codes, Catalogs and Profiles can be maintained in Customizing
- BW analyses could be defined based on the codes entered in the service order
• Enter the inspection results in a predefined and assigned inspection report.
• Plan the required repair steps and required spare parts (Repair Step Planning).
• Document usage decisions (scrapping, repair).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 325/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-13
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Repair Step Planning
Service Contract Determination
The system automatically checks for each repair step and spare partitem whether service contracts exists for the customer.
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
Repair step
planning
Relevant service contract information is visible from in-house repair order item referring to servicecontract.
Pricing
The system determines the prices for each repair item.
The different factors influencing pricing can include:
• Spare parts and services included in the warranty
• Customer-specific prices (discount)
• Service contract-specific price agreements
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 326/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-14
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Quotation
In-House Repair Order
Step 1:Create an in-house
repair order with initial
status Quotation Quotation accepted
Item Cat. Status
Dismantle SRVQ Quotation
Quotation accepted
Item Cat. Status
Filter SRPQ Quotation
Step 2:Convert to status
Result: One single document
All pricing-relevant service items and spare part items get the status
Quotation.
Quotations provide customers with information regarding pricesand terms of delivery before the actual in-house repair order items
are created
Accept quotation items: The status of quotation items can be converted from Quotation → Quotation accepted .
The service representative can start the repair.
Decline quotation items:
The status of quotation items can be converted from Quotation → Quotation declined.
The system should
• Create the outbound delivery to return the not repaired product
• Cancel the created spare part reservation in ERP.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 327/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-15
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Confirmation
Repair
Request Return
Request
In-House
Repair
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
In-House Repair Order Service Confirmation
Diagnostic
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
The confirmation is a follow-up document for the in-house repair order.
The service representative confirms
The time he spent for each planned and unplanned repair step
The spare parts he used to repair the product (planned and unplanned
spare parts)
The service representative can differentiate between:• Normal working hours and overtime (valuation type)
• Experienced and not experienced working time (service type)
• Warranty or free of charge items (accounting indicator)
Spare part items:
• The system determines the correct in-house repair storage location.
• Each spare part item updates the determined in-house repair stock and the existing reservation.
Repair step items:
• Each time confirmation updates the Cross Application Time Sheet (CATS) in ERP and at least theassigned controlling object.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 328/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-16
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Delivery of Repaired Product
Repair
Request Return
Request
In-House
Repair
Diagnostic
Repair step 1
Repair step 2
Spare Part 1
CRM
In-House Repair Order ERP
Sales Order
Return Repaired
Product
Return
Request
Return Repaired
Product
The sub-item Return repaired product documents that the repaired
product can be returned to the customer.
After saving the In-house repair order, this item is replicated into a sales
order item in SAP ERP, where the outbound delivery process can start.
(Outbound delivery, packaging, goods issue, ...)
When the part is completely repaired, the sub-item Return Repaired Product will control the ability tocreate an outbound delivery to the customer. This item is a sub-item of the Repair Request item.
The Return Repaired Product item is replicated to the ERP system where the outbound delivery process
is handled.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 329/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-17
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Basic Functions
Reference Objects
Contract determinationWarranty determination
Return Material Authorization
Reference Objects• You can provide additional information about the product that is the subject of the repair by entering
a reference to objects. The reference object can also be assigned at header level of the in-houserepair order. Information about the relationship between a product and an IBase enables you, for
example, to analyze In-house repair orders to identify problems that depend on the IBase in which a
product is installed.
Contract determination
• Automatic check for valid service contracts from in-house repair order processing, based on
- Business partner, validity period, object list
- Product list and value/quantity limits
• A service contract assignment affects the calculation of the delivery dates based on agreed SLA and
In-house repair order pricing.
…
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 330/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-18
…
Warranty determination
• An automatic check determines whether a warranty exists for the customer-specific objects. This
information can be used to make decisions which subsequent actions have to be taken. For example,
if a warranty exists, the system should not create any invoices for the repair.
• The warranty check is based on
- Maintained warranty conditions for the individual object or installed base component
• Manually maintained reference date
• If a warranty exists, the system will copy the warranty data into all sub-items.
Return Material Authorization
• The unique CRM in-house repair order number, which is also available in the R/3 system, supports
the unique RMA number
• The customer receives an Return Material Authorization number, which is used to uniquely identify
the shipment.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 331/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-19
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Additional Functionality
Amount Allocation
Counters
Qualifications
Templates
Product Proposal
Amount Allocation• You can use amount allocation to allocate the value of a billing document, or the value of individual
items in a service order to several invoice recipients or payers. You can make this allocation in theorder or in the confirmation, or in the amount allocation document itself, whereby allocation to the
respective follow-up document is copied as a default value but can still be changed.
Counters
Qualifications
Templates
• Templates are predefined repair steps (services and spare parts, including default quantities).
• Templates can be selected as sub-items during in-house repair order creation.
Product Proposal
• Product proposals can be generated and selected as sub-items during in-house repair order creation.
• The system determines the assigned services based on the product to be repaired, and offers a list
where the user can select the required repair steps.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 332/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-20
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Logistics Integration
Availability Information
ERP ReservationUpdate Reservation and Spare Part
Stock Integration of Loan Device Processing
Availability Information• The user can see ATP information for all selected spare part items against the ERP system.
• The delivers the available quantity and earliest availability date. This information is based on theERP settings.
• After saving the In-house repair order, the ATP information is deleted.
• The relevant ATP plant for In-house repair orders is defined in Customizing.
Reservation
• After saving the in-house repair order, the system creates an ERP reservation in the in-house repair
service plant for all spare part items.
• These demands can now trigger the purchasing processing.
• A spare part confirmation updates the existing reservation and stock in ERP.
Loan Device Handling
• For each repair item, you have the option of sending a loan device to your customer, thereby bridging
long repair times. The repair order manages the loan devices.
…
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 333/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-21
…
Delivery-relevant Sub-items
• All delivery-relevant sub-items are replicated into ERP sales order items.
A delivery is created for each item and the goods receipt for inbound deliveries and a good issue for
outbound deliveries is posted.
For example
• “Send in product to repair”
• “Return repaired product”
• “Loan device delivery / Loan device pick up“
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 334/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-22
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Understand the customizing settings for In-House Repair
In-House Repair Customizing: Topic Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 335/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-23
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Customizing
Standard transaction types:
REPA – In-House Repair
Standard item categories:
RREQ – Repair Request
Item category determination for sub-items
RSUB – Send in Repair (Inbound)
RRET – Delivery Repair (Outbound)
DGNS – Diagnosis
LOAN – Send Replacement (Outbound)
LRET – Replacement (Inbound)
SCRP – Scrapping
SRVP – Repair Step
SRVM – Spare Part
The item category for the subitems is determined by the transaction type, the item category group (fromthe product master), the usage (from the action definition), and the main item category.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 336/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-24
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: ERP Relevant Actions
Create Send in Repairs
SAP ERP return request is created for goods receipt processing.
Create Repaired goods delivery
A SAP ERP delivery document is created and managed in the
delivery list to return the repaired product to the customer.
Create Replacement (Loan Device Delivery)
A SAP ERP delivery document is created and managed in the
delivery list to send a loan device to the customer.
Create Temporary Replacement Collection (Loan Device Pick-Up)
A SAP ERP delivery document is created and managed in the
delivery list to pick up the loan device from the customer.
Create Scrapping
A SAP ERP goods issue is triggered to update the in-house repair
order stock.
Actions• Flexible definition of actions (standard and customer-specific actions)
• Representation of recurring process steps
• Assignment of actions at header, item or sub-item level
• Standard actions are used to create sub-items
• Two types of sub-item exist:
- SAP ERP relevant sub-items
Create an SAP ERP document
Trigger follow-up processes like inbound delivery processing or outbound delivery processing
- CRM relevant sub-itemsCan be used for additional CRM processes like resource planning or confirmations
• Manually triggered by user OR automatically triggered by planning and start conditions
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 337/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-25
SAP AG 2004
In-House Repair: Unit Summary
You are now able to:
Describe the options for in-house repair processing
Create and manage an in-house repair order
Perform Customizing settings for in-house repair
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 338/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-26
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 339/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-27
Exercises
Unit: In-House Repair
Topic: In-House Repair Processing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create and manage an in-house repair order
In-House Repair, processing provides you with a wide range of
functions for managing all the necessary activities, which repairinggoods for a customer entails, from registering the repair request from
the customer through to billing the customer for the services performed. The process is fully integrated into SAP ERP logistics.
In this exercise, the service department receives a repair request froma customer. The customer sends a notebook with bad display to the
service department for repair. After the product sent in for repair is
received, a service technician performs a technical analysis andenters the inspection result.
The service technician plans the necessary repair services and spare
parts. After completion of the repair, the technician reports working
time and material used.
The repaired product is returned to the customer and a return deliveryof the loan devices is triggered.
1-1 What are standard options available in the process flow for the in-house repair?
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 340/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-28
1-2 Order: Repair request and send in repairs
The customer informs you that he has a notebook with bad display (horizontal lines in
the display) that he would like you to repair.
You record the details of the customer's repair request (reference object; kind of
damage) as the main item in a repair order.
You create a return item which shows that an inbound delivery is expected for thenotebook. The unique RMA number (Return Material Authorization) is made up of theunique number of the In-house repair order and the item number of the returns item.
The customer uses the RMA number to send the defective product in for repair.
1-2-1 Create an in-house repair order of type SAP Repairs for your customer
##Megastore with a description In-House Repair ##. Mark the priority as
very high.
Sold to Party: ##Megastore
Description: In-house Repair ##
Priority: Very High
1-2-2 Enter the product the customer wishes to return:
Product: HT-1011
Quantity: 1
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No
assignment.
What is the item category determined for this line item?
_______________________________
1-2-3 Add the component number 3305 on the line item. This will identify the object
being repaired more precisely than a product number alone.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No
assignment.
The system informs you if the object is under warranty.
1-2-4 Add a reason for the complaint. Choose a reason, such as: Malfunction in
LCD display
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 341/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-29
1-2-5 Create a line item to send in the repair by triggering the action Send in Repairs.
The system creates a sub item of category Return for repair for the main repair
item. The return item shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the higher-level item.
What is the item category determined for the new line item?
______________________________
1-2-6 Release all service items and save your transaction
Note the transaction number.
_______________________________
1-3 Logistics: Return for Repair
The notebook arrives at your service plant. You will post goods receipt. It will be posted
under repair order stock.
1-3-1 Post Goods receipt.
Shipping Point: 3800
Selection Date: Today’s date
Order: Your transaction number
Choose Post Goods Issue.
It might happen that the repair order is still blocked for a moment. In thiscase choose Create Outbound Delivery again until the order is released.
1-3-2 Check the stock for your material HT-1011 in plant 3800.
1-4 Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary replacement)
After the notebook sent in for repair is received, a service representative performs a
technical analysis and enters the inspection results. He/she decides what actions need to betaken to fulfil the customer's repair request.
The actions, which need to be taken as a result of the technical check, are recorded as sub-
items of the diagnosis item. What actions are possible?
• ________________________
• ________________________
• ________________________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 342/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-30
1-4-1 Create a Diagnosis Item.
In our example, the technician decides to perform the repair using a service and a
spare part. Trigger the action Diagnosis.
What is the item category created for this new item?
1-4-2 Create repair steps. Trigger the action Repairs + Spare Parts for your Diagnosis
line item.
Use the product SRV2_9 for the service.
The system proposes the item being repaired as the material. Since we will be
using a spare part in our repair, replace the material HT-1011 with the following
information:
Product: HT-1069
Quantity: 1
1-4-3 Release the items and save your transaction.
1-5 Repair completion confirmation
After completion of the repair, the service technician reports working time and material
used.
1-5-1 Open your existing in-house repair order to create a follow-up confirmation
transaction.
The diagnosis, the service and the spare part item are confirmation relevant.
Copy these three items to the confirmation.
1-5-2 Change the service technician assignment to Lou Windham.
Exec. Service Employee: Windham
Select Enter to confirm.
1-5-3 Enter the duration of the work for the products on the services tab view:
SRV_DIAGNOSIS 20 MIN
SRV2_9 60 MIN1-5-4 Mark the items as complete and save the confirmation.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 343/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-31
1-6 Order: Return delivery for the repair
You create a new item to trigger the return delivery of the repaired notebook.
1-6-1 Open your in-house repair order and make sure you are in change mode.
1-6-2 Choose the Return for Repair item line and trigger the action for a delivery.
The system creates a new item line that triggers the return delivery of the repaired
notebook.
What is the item category of the newly created item? __________________
1-6-3 Release the items and save the order.
1-7 Logistics: Return delivery for the repair
The notebook is returned to the customer. When you post goods issue for the delivery,
stock is adjusted accordingly.
1-7-1 Create the Outbound Delivery.
1-7-2 Enter the following information:
Shipping Point: 3800
Selection date: Today’s date
Order: Your transaction number
Choose Enter .
Choose Subsequent Functions Create Transfer Order .
In the dialog box, choose Yes.
Enter the following data:
Warehouse Number: 038
Delivery: Leave as default
Foreground/Background: System Guided
Adopt Pick Quantity: 2
Choose Enter .
Save.
1-7-2 Check the stock overview for material HT-1011 in plant 3800.
The sales order stock for the in-house-repair has been reduced accordingly.Depending on the initial stock situation in the demo system, it might be that no
sales order stock appears at all.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 344/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-32
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 345/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-33
Solutions
Unit: In-House Repair
Topic: In-House Repair Processing
1-1 What are standard options available in the process flow for the in-house repair?
Process Flow
• Order: Repair request and send in repair
• Logistic: Return for repair
• Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary
replacement)
• Logistic: Loan device delivery
• Repair completion confirmation
• Order: Return delivery for the repair
• Logistic: Return delivery for the repair
1-2 Order: Repair request and send in repairs
The customer informs you that he has a notebook with bad display (horizontal lines in
the display) that he would like you to repair.
You record the details of the customer's repair request (reference object; kind ofdamage) as the main item in a repair order.
You create a return item which shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the
notebook. The unique RMA number (Return Material Authorization) is made up of the
unique number of the In-house repair order and the item number of the returns item.The customer uses the RMA number to send the defective product in for repair.
1-2-1 Create an in-house repair order of type SAP Repairs for your customer
##Megastore with a description In-House Repair ##. Mark the priority asvery high.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Service Maintain Complaints and In-House Repairs
From the menu: Business Transaction Create.
Choose Complaints SAP Repairs.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 346/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-34
PCUI:
Navigate to Service Processing In-House Repairs
Choose New
Choose SAP Repairs.
In either GUI, enter the following data:
Sold to Party: ##Megastore
Description: In-house Repair ##
Priority: Very High
To confirm your entries, choose Enter .
1-2-2 Add the product the customer wishes to return:
Product: HT-1011
Quantity: 1To confirm your entries, choose Enter.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No
assignment.
What is the item category determined for this line item?
RREQ - repair request
SAPGUI:
The item category can be seen by choosing the button Item Details, then
scrolling to the right on the line item level.
PCUI:
The item category can be viewed on the line item on the products tab. You mayneed to choose Personalize to make the item category field visible.
1-2-3 Add the component number 3305 on the line item level. This will identify the
object being repaired more precisely than a product number alone.
SAP GUI:
On the Fast Entry screen, enter 3305 in the component field.
PCUI:
Stay on the Product s tab. Enter 3305 in the component field.
Choose Enter to confirm your entries.
If the system proposes the assignment of a service contract, choose No
assignment.
The system informs you if the object is under warranty.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 347/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-35
1-2-4 Add a reason for the complaint. Choose a reason, such as: Malfunction in
LCD display
SAP GUI:
Choose a reason from the dropdown box.
PCUI:
Choose the Technical Analysis tab for the item level under the tab Products. On the Technical Analysis tab, use the drop down box to choose Reason for
Complaint.
Choose a reason from the list then press Confirm.
1-2-5 Create a line item to send in the repair by triggering the action Return for
Repairs.
The system creates a sub item of category Return for repair for the main repairitem. The return item shows that an inbound delivery is expected for the higher-
level item.
What is the item category determined for the new line item?
RSUB – Repair Return.
SAP GUI:
Choose button Return for Repairs on the bottom of the Fast Entry Screen.
PCUI:
Go to the Scheduled Actions tab on item level.
Add an entry. You will receive a pop-up.
Choose action Return for Repairs.
1-2-6 Release all service items and save your transaction
Note the transaction number.
_______________________________
SAP GUI:
Release all service items by choosing Release Items.
Save.
PCUI:
Choose button Service Status and then choose Release Items.
Save
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 348/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-36
1-3 Logistics: Return for Repair
The notebook arrives at your service plant. You will post goods receipt. It will be posted
under repair order stock.
1-3-1 Post Goods receipt.
Shipping Point: 3800
Selection Date: Today’s date
Order: Your transaction number
SAP GUI:
Log on to the SAP ERP system.
Use the following menu path in the SAP ERP system:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and
Transportation → Outbound Delivery→ Create → Single Document → With
reference to Sales Order (VL01N).
Enter the data above and press Enter .
Choose Post Goods Issue.
PCUI:
Navigate to R/3 Integration → Create Outbound Delivery.
Enter the data above and press Enter .
Choose Post Goods Issue.
It might happen that the repair order is still blocked for a moment. In this
case choose Create Outbound Delivery again until the order is released.
1-3-2 Check the stock for your material HT-1011 in plant 3800.
Enter the material HT-1011 and plant 3800.
Choose Execute (F8).
Double click on the line Sales order stock
The stock for the product sent in for repair is order specific.
Close the window after viewing the information.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu Logistics Materials Management Inventory Management
Environment Stock Stock Overview (MMBE)
PCUI:
Navigate to R/3 Integration Stock Overview R/3.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 349/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-37
1-4 Order: Technical analysis and subsequent actions (repair and temporary replacement)
After the notebook sent in for repair is received, a service representative performs atechnical analysis and enters the inspection results. He/she decides what actions need to be
taken to fulfil the customer's repair request.
The actions, which need to be taken as a result of the technical check, are recorded as sub-items of the diagnosis item. What actions are possible?
• Perform repairs
• Scrap the goods
• Send temporary replacement
1-4-1 Create a Diagnosis Item.
In our example, the technician decides to perform the repair using a service and a
spare part. Trigger the action Diagnosis.
What is the item category created for this new item? DGNS – diagnosis item.
SAP GUI:
In the CRM system, use the following menu path:
SAP Menu Service Maintain Complaints and In-House-Repairs
Choose icon Open Business Transaction
Enter your transaction number and press Enter.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Choose button Diagnosis.
PCUI:
Navigate to Service Processing In-House-Repairs
Enter the transaction number of the repair order and choose Go.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Go to the Products tab.
Choose the Scheduled Actions tab for the main line item.
Choose Add.
Choose Diagnosis.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 350/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-38
1-4-2 Create repair steps. Trigger the action Repairs + Spare Parts for your Diagnosis
line item.
SAP GUI:
Use the Actions icon (Toolbox) at the top of the screen and choose Repairs +Spare Parts (1200).
The system proposes service and spare part products (relationships of HT-1011)
First choose service SRV2_9 and choose Enter .
Then choose spare part HT-1069 and choose Enter .
PCUI:
Mark the Diagnosis line item and choose Scheduled Actions on the line item level.
Choose Add .
Choose Repairs + Spare Parts.
The system creates two new line items ( Repairs and SAP Service Material Item).
Use the product SRV2_9 for the service.
The system proposes the item being repaired as the material. Since we will be
using a spare part in our repair, replace the material HT-1011 with the followinginformation:
Product: HT-1069
Quantity: 1
To confirm your entries, select Enter.
1-4-3 Release the items and save your transaction.
SAP GUI:
Return to the Fast Entry Screen.
Choose Release items.
Choose Save.
PCUI:
Choose Service Status, then choose Release items.
Choose Save.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 351/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-39
1-5 Repair completion confirmation
After completion of the repair, the service technician reports working time and material
used.
1-5-1 Open your existing In-house Repair Order to create a follow-up confirmation
transaction.
SAP GUI:In your SAP Repair Order, choose Create Follow-Up Transaction
Service Confirmation→ Confirmation
The system displays several items but only the diagnosis, the service and the spare
part item are confirmation relevant.
Check these three items and choose Copy.
Choose Fast Entry.
PCUI:
Navigate to Service Processing In-house Repairs
Enter the transaction number of the repair order and choose Go.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Choose Expand .
Choose Create Confirmation.
Choose Confirmation.
In the dialog box, choose Save.
The system opens a new window for the confirmation.
Choose Copy All
1-5-2 Change the service technician assignment to Lou Windham.
Service Technician: Windham
Select Enter to confirm.
1-5-3 Enter the duration of the work for the products on the services tab view:
SRV_DIAGNOSIS 20 MIN
SRV2_9 60 MIN
SAP GUI:
Choose the Services tab.
PCUI:
Choose the Products tab. Use the dropdown box to switch to the Services view.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 352/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-40
1-5-4 Mark the items as complete and save the confirmation.
SAP GUI:
Choose Complete.
Choose Save
PCUI:
Choose Expand .
Choose Complete items.
Choose Save.
1-6 Order: Return delivery for the repair
You create a new item to trigger the return delivery of the repaired notebook.
1-6-1 Open your in-house repair order and make sure you are in change mode.
SAP GUI:Use the icon Open Business Transaction.
Enter the transaction number of the In-House Repair Order and press Enter.
Alternatively you could use the backwards icon in order to go back to your In-House Repair order.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
PCUI:
Navigate to Service Processing→ In-house Repairs
Enter the transaction number of the repair order and choose Go.
Choose Change if you are in a display mode.
Please delete flag Sel for the main item (1000) before processing the next step.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 353/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-41
1-6-2 Choose the Return for Repair item line and trigger the action for a delivery.
SAP GUI:
Use the Actions icon (Toolbox) and choose Delivery: Repair (1100).
PCUI:
Choose Scheduled Actions for the line item. Choose Add . Choose action Delivery: Repair .
The system creates a new item line that triggers the return delivery of the repaired
notebook.
What is the item category of the newly created item?
RRET – repaired goods delivery.
1-6-3 Release the items and save the order.
SAP GUI:
Choose Release Items on the Fast Entry Screen. Choose Save.
PCUI:
Choose Expand . Choose Release items. Choose Save.
1-7 Logistics: Return delivery for the repair
The notebook is returned to the customer. When you post goods issue for the delivery,stock is adjusted accordingly.
1-7-1 Create the Outbound Delivery.
SAP GUI:
Use the R/3 menu path:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and
Transportation → Outbound Delivery→ Create → Single Document → With
reference to Sales Order (VL01N).
PCUI:
Navigate to R/3 Integration→ Create Outbound Delivery.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 354/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-42
1-7-2 Enter the following information:
Shipping Point: 3800
Selection date: Today’s date
Order: Your transaction number
Choose Enter .
Choose Subsequent Functions Create Transfer Order .
In the dialog box, choose Yes.
Enter the following data:
Warehouse Number: 038
Delivery: Leave as default
Foreground/Background: System Guided
Adopt Pick Quantity: 2
Choose Enter . Save.
1-7-3 Check the stock overview for material HT-1011 in plant 3800.
SAPGUI:
Use the following R/3 Menu path:
SAP Menu → Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management →
Environment → Stock → Stock Overview (MMBE)
PCUI:
Navigate to R/3 Integration Stock Overview R/3.
In both SAPGUI and PCUI:
Choose Execute (F8)
The sales order stock for the in-house-repair has been reduced accordingly.Depending on the initial stock situation in the demo system, it might be that no
sales order stock appears at all.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 355/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-43
ExerciseR-
Unit: In-house Repair
Topic: In-house Repair Customizing
1-1 Review the customizing settings for the in-house repair orders.
1-1-1 Review the item category determination for the SAP Repair Order. What item
category is determined when a normal item is entered on an REPA transaction?
_____________________________
1-1-2 What action profile is assigned to this item category?
_____________________________
1-1-3 Review the action profile to determine which actions are available on a return
request item.
______________________________
______________________________
.
1-1-4 What controls that the action REPAIR_RETURN can be triggered manually in
the repair order?
______________________________________________________________
1-1-5 When the REPAIR_RETURN action is triggered, which entry will be used to
determine the item category for a standard item? Why?
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
1-1-6 What action profile is attached to this item category?
________________________________
1-1-7 What action is available in that action profile? When will this action be invoked?
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
1-1-8 When the item is sent in by the customer, the service technician will look over the
item to see what repairs need to be done. The standard action used is
REPAIR_DIAGNOSIS. What item category determination entry is used in thiscase for our standard item?
__________________________________________________________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 356/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-44
1-1-9 What action profile is used by this diagnosis item category?
______________________________________________
1-1-10 What types of actions are possible in this action profile?
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 357/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-45
SolutionsR-
Unit: In-house Repair
Topic: In-house Repair Customizing
1-1 Review the customizing settings for the in-house repair orders.
1-1-1 Review the item category determination for the SAP Repair Order. What item
category is determined when a normal item is entered on an REPA transaction?
Architecture and Technology→ Configuration→ Customizing (SPRO)
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Category Determination
Use the position button to find the entry.
Transaction type: REPA
Item Category Group: NORM
The item category determined is RREQ.
1-1-2 What action profile is assigned to this item category?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Categories
Use the position button
Item Category: RREQ
The action profile used is REPAIR_REQUEST - Repair Request.
1-1-3 Review the action profile to determine which actions are available on a return
request item.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ Basic
Functions→ Actions→ Actions in Transaction→Change Actions and
Conditions→
Define Action Profiles and ActionsUse the position button
Action Profile: REPAIR_REQUEST
Mark the line with REPAIR_REQUEST and choose Action Definition in theDialog structure on the left.
There are two actions: REPAIR_DIAGNOSIS and REPAIR_RETURN.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 358/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-46
1-1-4 What controls that the action REPAIR_RETURN can be triggered manually in the
repair order?
Mark the REPAIR_RETURN action and choose Details.
The settings “Immediate Processing” and the checkboxes Executable in Dialog and
Display in Toolbox allow the action to be available and manually triggered.
1-1-5 When the REPAIR_RETURN action is triggered, which entry will be used todetermine the item category for a standard item? Why?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Category Determination
Use the position button to find the entry.
Transaction type: REPA
Item Category Group: NORM
The entry used will be: Transaction Type REPA, item category group NORM,usage RSUB, and main level item RREQ. The item category determined is RSUB.
The REPAIR_RETURN action will trigger the system to look for the usage RSUB
and the item will be a sub-item created under the main action with the item
category of RREQ.
1-1-6 What action profile is attached to this item category?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Categories
Use the position button
Item Category: RSUB
The action profile used is REPAIR_RETURN - Return for Repair.
1-1-7 What action is available in that action profile? When will this action be invoked?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ Basic
Functions→ Actions→ Actions in Transaction→Change Actions and
Conditions→ Define Action Profiles and Actions
Use the position button
Action Profile: REPAIR_RETURN
Mark the line with REPAIR_RETURN and choose Action Definition in the Dialogstructure on the left.
There are is one action: REPAIR_RETURN_DELIVERY
This action will be used to return the item to the customer when the repair is
finished.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 359/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-47
1-1-8 When the item is sent in by the customer, the service technician will look over the
item to see what repairs need to be done. The standard action used isREPAIR_DIAGNOSIS. What item category determination entry is used in this
case for our standard item?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Category Determination
Use the position button to find the entry.
Transaction type: REPA
Item Category Group: NORM
The entry used will be: Transaction Type REPA, item category group NORM,
usage DGNS, and main level item RREQ. The item category determined is DGNS.
The REPAIR_DIAGNOSIS action will trigger the system to look for the usage
DGNS and the item will be a sub-item created under the main action with the item
category of RREQ.
1-1-9 What action profile is used by this diagnosis item category?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Item Categories
Use the position button
Item Category: DGNS
The action profile used is REPAIR_DIAGNOSIS_RESULT_ITEM - Repair –
Result of Diagnosis (Item).
1-1-10 What types of actions are possible in this action profile?
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ Basic
Functions→ Actions→ Actions in Transaction→Change Actions andConditions→ Define Action Profiles and Actions
Use the position button
Action Profile: REPAIR_DIAGNOSIS_RESULT_ITEM
Mark the line with REPAIR_DIAGNOSIS_RESULT_ITEM and choose ActionDefinition in the Dialog structure on the left.
There are five actions: two for repair, two for temporary replacements, and one for
scrapping the item.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 360/439
© SAP AG CR700 9-48
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 361/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-1
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claims
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 362/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-2
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the features of warranties
Create warranty products
Explain the effect of both customer and vendor warranties on
service processing
Create a warranty claim for service and parts covered by a
vendor warranty
Perform Customizing settings for warranties
Warranty Claims: Unit Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 363/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-3
SAP AG 2004
Warranty - Definition
A warranty is a promise made by us to the customer
Or by a supplier to us…
Guaranteeing that a product is without defects
With a validity for a specific period
Defining entitlements for repair or exchange of defect parts
Wholly or in part without charge
Warranties can be flexibly assigned to individual products, installed base components, or individualobjects.
When creating service orders, confirmations, repair orders, or complaints, the system automatically runs
a background check to see whether a warranty exists and then assigns this accordingly.
When calculating prices for the services and service parts in billing, warranties can be taken into
account through the use of appropriate discounts.
Warranties will be created in product master data maintenance using the product type Warranty.
Following information can be entered for a warranty:
• Warranty Category (Customer / Vendor warranty)
• Warranty Basis (Time / Counter / Time-/Counter dependent)
• Warranty Period
• Accounting Indicator (criterion according to which you can differentiate between billable, non- billable, and partially billable products for pricing and controlling purposes)
• Warranty Catalog (for including/excluding catalogs, code groups or codes)
• Warranty Services (for including/excluding products, product groups, item categories or item object
types)
• Warranty Counter Data (for specifying the counter readings up to which the warranty is valid)
This data is validated in the service transactions during the warranty check against the item data in the
transaction.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 364/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-4
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 365/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-5
SAP AG 2004
IBase
Component
Installation
Relationship
Warranty
Master
e.g. Individual
Object
Attributes:
Start date
Rule start
End date
Rule end
Warranty category
(customer)
Warranty Basis
(time, counter,
time and/or counter)
Period
(validity)
Subjects
(including, excluding)
Services
(including, excluding)
Rule Start
(e.g. Iobject
installation date)
Rule End
(e.g. start date + runtime)
Product Master
Warranties - Assignment
Relationships
Assignment and tracking of warranties Product master
• Warranty information for Individual Objects created with reference to product, for example, product
registration using e-Service
• Warranty information for non-individualized customer products, for example, complaint processing
for consumer products
Individual Object
• Assigned automatically when referencing a product master
• Date attributes of Individual Object such as delivery date, installation date, can be used for start date
determination Installed Base component
• Rule based or manual maintenance of warranty start date
Allows multiple assignment of warranties
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 366/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-6
SAP AG 2004
Service Process – Warranty Validation
Automatic check in Service Order, Repair Order and
Complaint
Check for coverage of product that is subject of service includingscope of entitlement (e.g. free parts and labor)
Repeated warranty validation when relevant data has changed,
e.g. damage code after inspection
Relevant warranty data displayed and stored in document
Warranty Pricing and Billing Integration
Immediate determination of influence on pricing and billing
Accounting indicator copied as default from warranty
Pricing conditions based on accounting indicator
Rule-based Warranty Cost Assignment
Immediate determination of influence on cost settlement
According to the settings in Customizing, when creating a service process with a transaction type forwhich warranty determination is activated, the system determines the warranty and copies it
automatically to the transaction. Contract determination occurs in the system based on the Installed Base
Component.
Relevant warranty information is visible from any service process a warranty is assigned to.
Full control of warranty expenses through rule-based warranty cost assignment
Warranty Analysis
• Provides information about the amount of products with or without warranty
• Monitors expired warranties per Installed Base and Individual Object
• Warranty expense analysis
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 367/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-7
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claims
A warranty claim is a document which canbe communicated to the manufacturer.
It holds information about vendor, services,quantity and amount
Claims amount to the vendor
Vendor can offer a different quantity oramount including a comment (text log)
Holds changes in a log
Can be created automatically
Checks relevance while creation
Creates an invoice
WHAT IS A WARRANTY CLAIM?
A Warranty Claim is an entitlement that a dealer has in relation to a product of a supplier ormanufacturer (the reimburser). The Warranty Claim is used to represent the entire Warranty process
from creating a Warranty Claim, the technical analysis and relevant follow-up process steps, through to
the statistical evaluation. Some of the relevant follow up processes can be
• Dealer returns the defective products
• Dealer sends invoice to vendor with reference to warranty claim
• Dealer gets a substitute delivery
The warranty claim processing component provides:
• Integration of service order and warranty claim in CRM using the same data model (Business
Transaction Concept).
• High-performance routine for checking warranty claims, allowing most of the claims to be checked
automatically.
• User interface for processing warranty claims manually.
• Data administration and an interface for communicating with the reimbursers.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 368/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-8
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claim Processing
7
4
2
3
5
1
6
Create warranty claim
Add information about
the claimed items
Send warranty claim
to the vendor
Vendor confirmsthe warranty claim
Send debit memo or invoice
to the vendor
Perform warranty
analysis
Execute and confirm
service order
Warranty Claim Processing
Enables handling of claims against the
manufacturer for warranty covered
parts and services
You can create warranty claims based on service orders, complaints or confirmations, both manuallyand automatically from actions, even for multiple items per order.
If you create a warranty claim with more than one item, the supplier (reimburser) must always be the
same. It is not possible to create a single claim for more than one supplier.
Warranty claims can be sent to various reminbursers (producers, vendors, and so on).
Once the reimburser has checked the claim and returned it, you can process it further.
In other words if you (or the merchant) do not accept the decision or if you want to correct the claims,
you can immediately send the claims back to the reimburser once more.
Once warranty management is completed the system generates and overview of the total costs and
revenue.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 369/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-9
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claim Creation
Warranty creation with reference to
Service order
Complaint
Service confirmation
Without reference
Warranty entitlement check
Action based
Automatic or manually triggered
Vendor warranty determination
Vendor determination
Prerequisites:• Business Partner Role “Vendor” need to be assigned to the reference object .
• Vendor warranty must exist and be assigned to the reference object.
The system automatically checks during creation of a service order to see if a warranty exists for the
product, object, or the installed base that has been entered.
A warranty check log contains information on checks that have been performed regarding existing
warranties for a selected service product, including the result and status of the checks performed.
Action to copy and filter warranty claim-relevant items and other relevant order data into a new
warranty claim.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 370/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-10
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claim Data
Header Data
Information valid for the warranty claim as a whole
(warranty claim number, status, description, priority, sold-to party,and so on)
Item Data
Information valid for specific warranty claim items only
(service item number, status, description, quantity,
unit of measure, counter reading, subject codes, and so on)
Service, spare part, and expense items are supported in the
warranty claim
Partner Determination
Supported within all service documents
Business partners can be found and entered into transactions
automatically
During processing the claim takes hold of the relevant information such as equipments serial numbers,damage codes / damage reasons (catalogs), prices, counter readings and all warranty-related information
so the process can be mostly be automated
When creation of a warranty claim is triggered either manually or automatically, all the structures of the
service order/confirmation (header, main item, item) are transferred to the items that are relevant for a
warranty.
During this process, the system creates independent items in the warranty claim for each item and sub-
item. This results in a document flow that you can call up for display.
• The following fields are transferred to the vendor:
- Net values
- Codes
- Texts
- Products
- Quantity
- Reference object information
- Counter
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 371/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-11
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claim Communications
Check and maintain warranty claim items during the
negotiation between the vendor and the dealer
OEM and Vendor
Dealer and Service Provider
Warranty Processing
Customer
XIF Interface
The warranty claim can be processed in two different variants: Simple or Complex Simple variant: Warranty Claim is accepted by the vendor directly.
Complex variant: Warranty Claim has to be negotiated on item level. The Claim is send back and forth
between the service provider and the vendor until a final settlement is reached. This variant can be
processed manually (paper based) or automatically via XIF interface (XML file).
In addition to whether the claim involves multiple contacts, there are also two alternatives for processing
the communication and negotiation with the vendor – either manual or via XIF with the SAP ERP
Warranty System.
The “manual warranty” is the core process, where the dealer prints the warranty claim and sends it to the
vendor manually.
The XIF-enabled process variant is different by the means of communication. The warranty claim issend as an EDI document via XIF to the vendor system.
SAP ERP warranty processing is separate from the CRM warranty claim solution. The CRM warranty
claim process includes the generic XIF interface only. Interface to SAP ERP is only possible with
mySAP ERP Warranty Claim via BAdI implementation. Manual handling of incoming Warranty Claims
possible.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 372/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-12
SAP AG 2004
Rejecting or Accepting Warranty Claim Item
Check and maintain warranty claim items during the negotiation
between the vendor and the dealer
Main items contains the claimed value of the dealer
Debit request sub item contains the vendor response.
System and User Status is used during the negotiation to indicate
where in the process the claim is
Send to vendor / returned from vendor
Vendor approves claim item
Vendor partially approves
Vendor rejects item
CRM Billing and Controlling integration
Debit request sub item contains the billing and controlling relevant
information.
Partially accepted items and rejected items are differentiated by their item status in the system.• Partially accepted items: The service provider sets the status of the item to status “partially
accepted by vendor“.
The Service Provider has now 2 options:
- The Service Provider does not accept the adjusted claim and resubmits a new version of the claim.
- The Service Provider accepts the settled amount of the vendor and changes the main item status to“complete” This status change leads to the “released for billing” of the sub-item.
• Rejected items: The service provider sets the status of the item to status “rejected by vendor“.
The Service Provider has now 2 options:
- Service Provider does not accept vendor rejection and resubmits new claim version with adjusted
claim value & quantity for negotiation.
- Service Provider accepts the rejection and changes the item status from ‘rejected’ to ‘completed’ .
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 373/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-13
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Monitoring
Service Process Monitor enables you to search for warranty claims in different statuses.
Note: Monitoring of warranty claims is currently only available in the SAP GUI.
For example:
Mark checkbox of system status as “Released” and “Send to Vendor” to get the open warranty claims
with outstanding vendor answer.
Mark checkbox of system status as “Released” and “Returned from Vendor” to get the returned
warranty claims which wait for completion or renegotiation.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 374/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-14
SAP AG 2004
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Perform customizing settings for warranty
Warranty Claims Customizing: Topic Objectives
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 375/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-15
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Templates
Warranty Templates make creating new
warranties easier.
They can include defaults for such fields as:
Description
Warranty Category
Warranty Basis
Date Profile
Warranty Start
Warranty End
Name of Period
Accounting Indicator
For creating frequently-used warranties, you can use a warranty template, which you define yourself,that is already filled with default values such as:
• Warranty Category
• Warranty Basis
• Date Profile
• Warranty Start
• Warranty End
• Name of Period
• Accounting Indicator
To define your own warranty templates, choose Customer Relationship Management > Master Data >
Products and then the activity Define Default Values for Warranties in the Implementation Guide
(IMG).
When creating a warranty in product master, you can then select a template in the set type Warranty in
the field Warranty Template. The data previously defined in the warranty template will be automatically
entered in the relevant field of the set type.
The values can be changed in warranty master record afterwards.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 376/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-16
SAP AG 2004
Define profile for warranty check:
Warranty check attributes settings:Scope of check
Reference date
Define Warranty Check Profile
Assign warranty check profile to transaction header:
Assign warranty check profile
The warranty check profile can be defined under Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Settings for Service Processes → Define Profile for Warranty Check . For each profile, you can
define the following attributes:
• Scope of Check
• Sequence
• Fix at Release
• Fix at Completion
• Reference Date
Assign the warranty check profile to the service contract transaction type under Customer Relationship
Management→ Transactions → Basic Settings → Define Transaction Types:
• Select Business Transaction Category Service Process
• Assign Warranty Check Profile
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 377/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-17
SAP AG 2004
Warranty Claim Customizing
Standard Delivered Objects in Warranty Claim
Processing
Transaction Type:
CLMA Warranty Claim
Item Categories:
CLMP Warranty Claim Item
CLMF Debit Memo Item for Warranty Claim
Transaction Type CLMA (Warranty Claim) has the business transaction category of Warranty Claim(BUS2000255).
Item category CLMP (Warranty Claim Item) was created with item object type CRM Warranty Claim
Item (BUS2000191).
Item category CLMF (Debit Memo Item for Warranty Claim) is also relevant for warranty management.
It contains item object type Customer Debit Memo Request Item (BUS2000167).
You can either use the transaction type and the item categories mentioned above, or you can copy them
and then change them to suit your business process.
Customer Relationship Management → Transactions → Basic Settings
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 378/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-18
SAP AG 2004
You should now be able to:
Describe the features of warranties
Create warranty products
Explain the effect of both customer and vendor warranties on service
processing
Create a warranty claim for service and parts covered by a vendor
warranty
Perform Customizing settings for warranties
Warranty Claims: Unit Summary
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 379/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-19
Exercises
Unit: Warranty Claims
Topic: Warranty Claim Processing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a vendor warranty and assign it to an installed base component.
• Create a confirmation and trigger the creation of a warranty claim withan action.
• Reflect the warranty process in the system depending on differentstatues (e.g. send claim to vendor or the vendor does accept partially
and rejects some of the claimed items).
• Process the debit memo request and invoice the vendor.
• Monitor open warranty claims using the Service Process Monitor.
A Warranty Claim is an entitlement that a dealer has in relation to a
product of a OEM. The Warranty Claim is used to represent the entire
Warranty process from creating a Warranty Claim, the technical analysisand relevant follow-up process steps, through to the statistical evaluation.
You can create Warranty Claim with reference to a service order or a
confirmation. This simplifies the creation of Warranty Claim since all of
the data (for example, partners, products, quantities, and prices) is copied
from the preceding document (via actions or copying control). It is also possible to create Warranty Claim without reference to a preceding
document.
1-1 Create a vendor warranty and assign it to an installed base component.
1-1-1 Log on to the your CRM system either with PC UI or SAP GUI.
1-1-2 Create a vendor warranty with the following information.
Warranty: Ven##_OneYear
Description: Vendor One-Year Warranty ##Category ID: WTYCAT002
Warranty (Time Dependent)
Warranty Category: Vendor Warranty
Warranty Basis: Time Dependent
Warranty Period: 1
Date Profile: Date Profile: Warranty Processing
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 380/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-20
Time Unit: Years
Date Type / Rule Start: Warranty Start / Today’s Date
Warranty End:
Date Type / Rule End: Warranty End /
Warranty Start + Warranty Period
Accounting Indicator: Warranty
Save your warranty.
1-1-3 Find your IBase component so that you may set up all the necessary information touse warranty processing. The component is a Laser Professional Eco (HT-1040)
and it is assigned to the ##Megastore Installation.
1-1-4 Add both vendor and customer warranties to the component.
Add your newly created vendor warranty Ven##_OneYear and the customer printer
warranty WP_004.
1-1-5 Add information about the relationship of the product to a vendor.
Partner Function: Vendor
Partner: 3276 (Global Computers)
Save your entries.
2-1 Create a new confirmation.
2-1-1 Create a Confirmation with the transaction type Confirmation.
Exec. Service Employee 400440Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Description: Scanner problems ##
Priority: Medium
Component: Your component.
2-1-2 Enter a defect code.
Defect Code/Subject code: Printer is dead.
2-1-3 Enter the service that was performed.
Product: SRV1_4
Quantity: 2 AU
2-1-4 Enter a service part that was used.
Product: HT-1040
Quantity: 1
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 381/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-21
2-1-5 Check whether a warranty has been found.
Check whether a message was created that a warranty was found.
Check the Warranty tab on item level:
Which warranty was found? ______________
Is it a vendor or a customer warranty? ______________
2-1-6 Create a new claim to process the warranty relevant items by running the action ZIDESCreation of Warranty Claim.
2-1-7 Complete the items and save your confirmation.
Your confirmation number:
_____________________
2-1-8 Open the document flow on header level to check if the new created warranty claim
appears as a reference.
Write down your warranty claim number:
______________________
3-1 Process the warranty claim.
3-1-1 Open your warranty claim.
3-1-2 Check if all items with vendor warranty are copied into the warranty claim, including the
item quantity, reference object, defect codes and description from the predecessor
document.
3-1-3 Which warranty type was determined by the system?
________________________________________
3-1-4 Check which vendor was determined by the system Who is the vendor? Where was
this information determined from?
________________________________________
3-1-5 Release all the items on your warranty claim.
3-1-6 Change the status of the claim to Send to Vendor on the header level.
3-1-7 Create a print out to process the warranty relevant items by triggering the action ZIDES
Print Claim.
3-1-8 We’ll assume that the warranty claim was returned from the vendor and is now ready for
further in-house processing.Go to the Status tab on the transaction header level.
Add the status Returned by Vendor manually.
Does the new status delete the old status Send to Vendor ?
______________________________
Save the transaction.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 382/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-22
3-2 In the next steps you will simulate the process where the service provider gets a reply from thevendor. The vendor only partially accepts the claimed hours and rejects the claimed spare part.
If the vendor rejects paying for an item, the status is set to Rejected by Vendor .
A service provider would then have two options:
• Service Provider does not accept vendor rejection and resubmits new claim
version with adjusted claim value & quantity for negotiation.• Service Provider accepts the rejection and changes the item status from
Rejected to Completed .
In our scenario, we accept the rejection and change the item status to completed.
3-2-1 First we simulate the rejection of the vendor of the spare part:
Make sure you are on the item HT-1040.
Go to the Status tab on the item level for HT-1040.
Set the status to Rejected by Vendor .
3-2-2 Then we simulate our response by setting the status to Completed.Set the status to Completed .
3-3 We will simulate the vendor accepting a partial amount for the service product.
3-3-1 Set the status on the service line item to Partially Accepted by Vendor .
Choose the Item Details (if you aren’t already on the item level)
Go to the Status tab for the item SRV1_4.
Set the status to Partially Accepted by Vendor .
3-3-2 In our scenario, the action to create the debit request sub-item needs to be executedmanually. (This could be set to occur automatically from the status change.)
Go to the Action tab for the item with the status Partially Accepted by Vendor.
Choose the action Create Billing Document Request.
3-3-3 Check if the system has copied the quantity & amount from the main item into the
debit request sub-item.
3-3-4 Manually update the quantity and amount in the debit request sub-item to the approved
value of the vendor.
Set the amount to 1 AU.
The Service Provider has now 2 options:
• The Service Provider does not accept the adjusted claim and resubmits a new
version of the claim.
• The Service Provider accepts the settled amount of the vendor and changes
the main item status to “complete” This status change leads to the “releasedfor billing” of the sub-item.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 383/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-23
3-3-5 In our scenario, we accept the vendor’s decision for this item and change the main item
status to Completed .
Go to the product with the item status Partially Accepted by Vendor and change thestatus of the main item to Completed .
3-3-6 At the end, complete the warranty claim on header level (status Completed ) and save theclaim.
The Status ‘for billing’ is automatically set at sub-item level.
3-3-7 Check the change history of the warranty claim items.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 384/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-24
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 385/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-25
Solutions
Unit: Warranty Claims
Topic: Warranty Claim Processing
1-1 Create a vendor warranty and assign it to an installed base component.
1-1-1 Log on to the CRM system either with PCUI or SAP GUI.
1-1-2 Create a vendor warranty with the following information.
Warranty: Ven##_OneYear
Description: Vendor One-Year Warranty #
Category ID: WTYCAT002
Warranty (Time Dependent)
Warranty Category: Vendor Warranty
Warranty Basis: Time Dependent
Date Profile: Date Profile:
Warranty Processing
Warranty Period: 1
Time Unit: Years
Warranty Start: Warranty Start
Date Rule Start: Today’s Date
Warranty End: Warranty End
Date Rule End: Warranty Start + Warranty
Period
Accounting Indicator: Warranty
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 386/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-26
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu→ Master Data→ Products→ Maintain→ Products.
Choose Create Warranty
Choose the Category WTYCAT002 and press Continue.
Enter the warranty identification and description listed above.
Go to the Warranty tab and enter the rest of the information.
Save your warranty.
PC UI:
Go to Products→ Warranties.
Choose New.
Enter the data shown above.
Save your warranty.1-1-3 Find your installed base component so that you may set up all the necessary
information to use warranty processing. The component is a Laser Professional
Eco (HT-1040) and it is assigned to the ##Megastore Installation.
SAP GUI:
Menu path: CRM Easy Access Menu→ Master Data→ Installed Base→ Change
Installed Base
Search using the dropdown button in the Installed Base field.
Enter ##Megastore in the External ID field (where ## is your group number).
Choose Start Search.
Choose the ##Megastore Installation.
Press Enter to view the details of this installed base.
Double-click on the component Laser Professional Eco (HT-1040).
PCUI:
Go to Installed Bases→ Installed Bases/Components.
Click on the button Show Advanced Search.
Enter *##* in the External ID field (where ## is your group number).
Choose Go.
Use the Go To dropdown button to choose Hierarchy.
Choose the component with the product HT-1040 (Laser Professional Eco).
Use the Go To dropdown button to choose Details.
You should now be on the detail screen for your HT-1040 component.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 387/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-27
1-1-4 Add both vendor and customer warranties to the component.
Add your newly created vendor warranty Ven##_OneYear and the customer printer
warranty WP_004.
SAP GUI:
Click on the Relationships to reach the Warranty tab page.
PC UI:
Go to the Warranty tab on this component.
On the warranty tab, add your new vendor warranty (VEN##_ONEYEAR).
Add WP_004 (printer warranty) as a customer warranty.
1-1-5 Add information about the relationship of the product to a vendor.
SAP GUI:
Choose the menu path Go to→ Partner .
PC UI:
Go to the Partners tab on this component.
Partner Function: Vendor
Partner: 3276 (Global Computers)
Save your entries.
2-1 Create a new confirmation.
2-1-1 Create a Confirmation with the transaction type Confirmation.SAP GUI:
Menu path: CRM Easy Access Menu→ Service→ Maintain Service Confirmations
From the menu at the top of the screen: Business Transaction→ Create.
PC UI:
Service Processing→ Confirmations.
Click on the button New
Description Printer Problems ##
Sold-to Party ##Megastore
Component Your component number
To search for your component, use the dropdown box in the component field.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 388/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-28
SAP GUI:
Use the Search for Component According to Product .
Enter ##Megastore in the Installed Base field and also enter HT-1040 in the Product ID field. When you press Enter, you should see a list which will include your installation’s
HT-1040.
PC UI:Enter *##* in the External ID field in the Search by Header Data (where ## is your
group number and also enter HT-1040 in the Product ID field in the Search by Product.
Choose Go.
Click on the box next to your component to confirm that it is correct.
2-1-2 Enter a Defect code.
Subject: Printer is dead.
In the PCUI, you will find defect codes on the tab Technical Analysis. Choose the entry Reason for Complaint from the drop down list. Select your defect code Printer is Dead.
Click Confirm to confirm the defect code.
2-1-3 Enter the service that was performed.
On the Overview tab in SAPgui or on the Products tab in PCUI:
Product: SRV1_4
Quantity: 2 AU
2-1-4 Enter a service part that was used.
Product: HT-1040
Quantity: 1
2-1-5 Check whether a warranty has been found.
If a valid warranty was found, the system displays a message that valid warranties were
found.
Go to the Warranty tab on item level.
SAP GUI:
Choose the Item Details button. Select the Warranty tab on item level.
PC UI:
Go to Products tab on header level, choose the service product and select the Warrantytab on item level.
Which warranty was found? Is it a vendor or a customer warranty?
The system should determine the customer warranty, which is assigned to the
installed base component (e.g. WP_004)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 389/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-29
2-1-6 Create a new claim to process the warranty relevant items by running the action ZIDES
Creation of Warranty. This action will manually trigger the creation of a warrantyclaim.
SAP GUI:
Press the button Transaction Data. Choose the Actions tab. Choose the button Create
Actions.
PC UI:
Press the button Schedule Actions at the header level.
2-1-7 Complete the items and save your confirmation. To save your settings, press the save
button and write down your confirmation number:
_______________
SAP GUI:
Return to the Fast Entry screen and click on the button marked Complete. Save.
PC UI:
Click the Service Status button and choose the entry Complete Items.
2-1-8 Open the document flow on header level to check if the newly created warranty claim
appears as a reference. You should see an entry from document type Warranty Claim.
Write down your warranty claim number:
__________________
SAP GUI:
Choose the button Document Flow.
PC UI:
Go to the header tab strip Document Flow.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 390/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-30
3-1 Process the warranty claim.
3-1-1 Open your warranty claim.
SAP GUI:
Choose the icon Open Business Transaction. Enter the number of your warranty claim.Press Enter . If it is in Display mode, choose the button Display/Change Trans.
PC UI:
Go to Service Processing→ Warranty Claims.
Search for your previously created warranty claim.
To find your warranty claim, press the Show Advanced Search button, enter thetransaction ID of your warranty claim document and press the Go button.
3-1-2 Check if all items with vendor warranty are copied into the warranty claim, such as the
item quantity, reference object, defect codes and description from the predecessor
document.
SAP GUI:
To check the description and the reference object, go to the Fast Entry screen.
The copied items and quantities are visible on the Item Details screen.
The defect codes are visible on the ‘Technical Analysis’ tab.
PC UI:
To check the description and the reference object, go to the General Data tab. The
description and the reference object details should be copied over from the confirmation.
The copied items and quantities are visible on the Products tab.
The defect codes are visible on the ‘Technical Analysis’ tab.
3-1-3 Which warranty type was determined by the system?
Click on Warranty tab on item level, to check which warranty has been determined.
The system should display the vendor warranty assigned to your installed base
component.
3-1-4 Check which vendor was determined by the system Who is the vendor? Where wasthis information determined from?
Go to the Partner tab and look up the vendor. You should see an entry with the partner
function vendor and the assigned business partner 3276 (Global Computers).
The vendor should also appear as the Payer and Bill-to Parties.
This is the vendor specified on our component.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 391/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-31
3-1-5 Release all the items on your warranty claim.
SAP GUI:
Choose the button Release Items on the Fast Entry screen.
PCUI:
Use the Claim Status button. Choose the entry Release Items.
3-1-6 Change the status of the claim to Send to vendor on header level.
SAP GUI:
Choose the Transaction Data button. Go to tab Status and use the dropdown
button to choose Send to Vendor .
PCUI:
Go to tab Status and press the button Add Entry. A new status automatically
appears with the entry Send to Vendor .
3-1-7 Create a print out to process the warranty relevant items by triggering the action ZIDES
Print Claim.SAP GUI:
Go to the Actions tab. Use the dropdown to choose the action ZIDES Print Claim.
PCUI:
Press the button PRINT and choose the action ZIDES Print Claim.
3-1-8 We’ll assume that the warranty claim was returned from the vendor and is now ready for
further in-house processing.
Set the status Returned by Vendor manually.
Go to the tab Status and press the button Add Entry. A new status automaticallyappears with the entry Returned by Vendor .
Save your settings.
Does the new status delete the old status Send to Vendor ?
Yes, the status Returned from Vendor will replace the former status Send to Vendor
once the Warranty Claim is saved.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 392/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-32
3-2 In the next steps you will simulate the process where the service provider gets a reply from thevendor. The vendor only partially accepts the claimed hours and rejects the claimed spare part.
If the vendor rejects paying for an item, the status is set to Rejected by Vendor .
A service provider would then have two options:
• Service Provider does not accept vendor rejection and resubmits new claim
version with adjusted claim value & quantity for negotiation.
• Service Provider accepts the rejection and changes the item status from Rejected to Completed .
In our scenario, we accept the rejection and change the item status to completed.
3-2-1 First we simulate the rejection of the vendor of the spare part:
Make sure you are on the item HT-1040.
Go to the Status tab on the item level for HT-1040.
Set the status to Rejected by Vendor .
3-2-2 Then we simulate our response by setting the status to Completed.
Set the status to Completed .
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 393/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-33
3-3 We will simulate the vendor accepting a partial amount for the service product.
3-3-1 Set the status on the service line item to Partially Accepted by Vendor .
SAP GUI:
Go to the Status tab for the item SRV1_4 and set the status to Partially Accepted by
Vendor .
PC UI:Go to the tab Status on item level and press the button Add Entry. Choose the entry
Partially Accepted by Vendor.
3-3-2 In our scenario, the action to create the debit request sub-item needs to be executed
manually. (This could be set to occur automatically from the status change.)
SAP GUI:
Go to the Action tab for the item with the status Partially Accepted by Vendor.Choose the action Create Billing Document Request.
PC UI:
Go to the product with the item status Partially Accepted by Vendor and press the
Schedule Actions button. Choose the action Create Billing Document Request .
3-3-3 Check if the system has copied the quantity & amount from the main item into the debitrequest sub-item.
You should see an additional line item with the copied values and a reference to the
higher level line item.
3-3-4 Manually update the quantity and amount in the debit request sub-item to the approved
value of the vendor.
Set the amount to 1 AU.
The Service Provider has now 2 options:
• The Service Provider does not accept the adjusted claim and resubmits a new
version of the claim.
• The Service Provider accepts the settled amount of the vendor and changes
the main item status to “complete” This status change leads to the “releasedfor billing” of the sub-item.
3-3-5 In our scenario, we accept the vendor’s decision for this item and change the main item
status to Completed .
Go to the product with the item status Partially Accepted by Vendor and change the
status of the main item to Completed .
3-3-6 At the end, complete the warranty claim on header level (status Completed ) and save the
claim.
The Status ‘for billing’ is automatically set at sub-item level.
3-3-7 Check the change history of the warranty claim items.
PCUI:
Go to the tab Change History on header level.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 394/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-34
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 395/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-35
ExercisesR-
Unit: Warranty Claims
Topic: Warranty Claim Customizing
1-1 Create a new warranty check profile.
1-1-1 In Customizing create a new warranty check profile ZWAR##.
Warranty Check Profile: ZWAR##
Description: ## Warranty Check
Scope of Check: Customer Warranties
Sequence: First Reference Object, then Complaint Item
Fix Flag at Release: Checked
Fix Flag at Completion: Checked
Reference Date: Notification Receipt
Save your entries.
1-2 Assign the warranty check profile to your complaint transaction type.
1-2-1 Assign the warranty check profile to your complaint transaction type.
2-1 Test your new warranty profile with your new transaction type.
2-1-1 Create a complaint with your new transaction type.
Choose your complaint transaction type.
Description: Printer breakdown ##-2
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Search for the component representing product HT-1040 in your ##Megastore
IBase.
Check whether a warranty has been determined according to your customizing.
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 396/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-36
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 397/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-37
SolutionsR-
Unit: Warranty Claims
Topic: Warranty Claim Customizing
1-1 Create a new warranty check profile.
1-1-1 In Customizing create a new warranty check profile ZWAR##.
Architecture and Technology→ Configuration→ Customizing
Choose SAP Reference IMG.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→ Transactions→ Settings for Complaints→ Define Profile for Warranty Check
Warranty Check Profile: ZWAR##
Description: ## Warranty Check
Scope of Check: Customer Warranties
Sequence: First Reference Object, then Complaint
Item
Fix Flag at Release: Checked
Fix Flag at Completion: Checked
Reference Date: Notification Receipt
Save your entries.
1-2 Assign the warranty check profile to your complaint transaction type.
1-2-1 Assign the warranty check profile to your complaint transaction type.
SAP Implementation Guide→ Customer Relationship Management→
Transactions→ Basic Settings→ Define Transaction Types
Search for your transaction type YC##
Scroll down to the bottom of the page and press the button Position.
Enter the technical key for your complaint transaction type YC## and press Enter .
Mark the entry YC##.
Double-click on Assignment of Business Transaction Categories.
Select the entry ##Complaint.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 398/439
© SAP AG CR700 10-38
Double click on Customizing Header in the dialog structure on the left-hand side.
Add your warranty check profile to your transaction type.
Save your entry.
2-1 Test your new warranty profile with your new transaction type.
2-1-1 Create a complaint with your new transaction type.
SAP GUI:
SAP Menu→ Service→ Maintain Complaints and In-house Repairs
From the menu on top choose Business Transaction→ Create.
PC UI
Service and Support→ Complaints
Choose Create.
Choose your complaint transaction type.
Description: Printer breakdown ##-2
Sold-to Party: ##Megastore
Search for the component representing product HT-1040 in your ##Megastore
IBase
To search for your component, use the dropdown box in the component field.
SAP GUI:
Use the Search for Component According to Product .
Enter ##Megastore in the Installed Base field and also enter HT-1040 in the Product ID
field. When you press Enter, you should see a list which will include your installation’s
HT-1040.
PCUI:
Enter *##* in the External ID field in the Search by Header Data (where ## is your
group number and also enter HT-1040 in the Product ID field in the Search by Product.
Choose Go.
Click on the box next to your component to confirm that it is correct.
Check whether a warranty has been determined according to your customizing.
Save your entries.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 399/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-1
SAP AG 2004
Case Management
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 400/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-2
SAP AG 2004
Case Management: Unit Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of CRM Case Management Create and process a case
Configure a case type
Perform Customizing settings for case management
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 401/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-3
SAP AG 2004
Case Management in mySAP CRM
Create case
74
2
3
5
1
6
Create case
hierarchy
Process case
Close case
Create service
confirmation
Perform
analysis of
case
Perform billing
The contact center agent processes several business transactions relating to a common issue. An alertinforms the agent to create a case to manage all the information together. The case is assigned to a case
processor.
The case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people to work on the case by creating
activities to be fulfilled by the team. Additionally, a case note is added instructing the team to link all
electronic forms to the case. A security level of confidentiality is assigned to the case.
While reviewing the case log, the case processor identifies another case related to the current case and
links this case to the current case as a sub-case.
The case processor creates a service confirmation to enter time and expenses associated with the case.
The case processor closes the case after having ensured that all activities, linked business transactions,
and sub-cases have been processed and closed.
Billing of time and expenses for the case.
Using predefined queries and reports, the service manager performs case analyses to maintain visibility
of case processes within his or her reach of responsibility.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 402/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-4
SAP AG 2004
Case Management
Case Management
Provides a central repository for managing
common information originating from multiple
sources and channels
Enables global exchange of information by
ensuring that all parties involved with a case have
access to the same information simultaneously
Supports the processing of linked cases together,
thus allowing a high volume of data resulting in a
lower cost per customer treatment
To have a comprehensive and in-depth history of the case To efficiently identify and react to customer needs
To build customer loyalty
To provide your organization with greater visibility of case information resulting in an improved
processing efficiency
Being an open solution, it supports the linking of objects from different applications, such as SAP CRM
and SAP ERP, as well as objects from external applications
A case can be considered as a “folder”, as an object that allows you to link many different objects
together.
A case is not an “order“ in the sense of the “one order concept“.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 403/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-5
SAP AG 2004
Case Management – Case Overview
Case (Case Type)
General Activities Partners Objects
Actions Transactions Attachments Hierarchy
Log Classification
Description
Priority /Status
ResponsiblePerson
Link anactivity
Create newactivity
Link anyPartner
MandatoryPartner
InstalledBase
Component
Product
iObject
Follow UpE-Mail
Alert
Link aComplaint
Create ServiceOrder
Link WordDocument
Link URL
Case withinCase
Change Log Classify Case
The case is controlled by a case type which controls the user interface. There are industry specific userinterfaces available.
Activities can be created and managed from within the case. The activities can be assigned to different
users than the one responsible for the case. Activity templates can be used to make repeated activities
easier to set up and manage.
Business Partners can be added to a case. A partner determination procedure controls which partners
are mandatory. Linked business partners could include persons responsible for a managing a case, as
well as persons who are affected by the outcome of the case, such as applicant, client, agent and so on.
Reference Objects can be linked to a case: these can be products, installed base, IBase component, or
individual objects.
Actions can be set off from within a case either manually or automatically.
Service orders can be created from within a case.
Independently created business transactions can be linked to a case.
Electronic documents, such as forms, templates or policies, can be linked.
Cases can be nested to form hierarchies of cases.
Maintaining an ongoing notes log captures case-relevant information. Case notes are user, date and
time-stamped.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 404/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-6
SAP AG 2004
Case Management Search Capabilities
Powerful case search
capabilities for text
searches of cases, casenotes and linked
documents
Separation of search
results and object details
Central Search in Portal
Branding Area
Powerful case search capabilities that support natural language text searches for case notes and content
of linked documents.
Case-specific analytical information to support the visibility of case characteristics for ease of search,
selection and processing.
Case classification enabling the grouping of cases for search, reporting and analysis reasons by defining
additional attributes that are saved with the case.
You can search for cases by specifying the Ref. Category ID field as the selection criteria within the
Advanced Search tool of CRM Case Management. In addition, selecting the checkbox Incl.
Subcategories lets you search for cases assigned to any sub-categories of the category defined in the Ref.
Category ID field.
You can activate an extended CRM Case search functionality, which enables a fast search via linked
objects including multiple values and ranges. In addition to the default standard search method, you canspecify the SAF/TREX search method. For more details refer to SAP Note 880200 as well as the IMG
Activity: Set Search Scenario. ( IMG: Customer Relationship Management→ Case Management→
Extended Customizing→ Set Search Scenario)
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 405/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-7
SAP AG 2004
Tracking Case History and Controlling Access
The Case Management
application enables case
processors to effectivelytrack changes to their cases
and manage access:
Ongoing notes log
Auditability through time, date and user stamps
Multiple types of notes available
Authorizations based on case types and case note types
User access limited to specific information within case types
Alerts can be triggered by events, such as overdue cases
Changes to a case are automatically recorded in a log, enabling you to fulfill legal requirements to provide audit trails for cases, and also providing you with useful progress information.
Cases can have more than one type of case note which allows you to further sort and manage
information. This is controlled by a text determination procedure assigned to the case type.
Changes to notes are tracked. Case notes are stamped with the user, date and time.
Authorizations restricting view and editing capabilities can be based on case types and case note types.
In addition, it is possible to restrict user access to specific information within an authorized case type.
You can improve processing efficiency by making case information globally accessible, while at the
same time ensuring the confidentiality of sensitive information through authorization checks.
Cooperation during case processing is facilitated by activities, which you can create and assign to the
corresponding processors.
Alerts can be triggered automatically by events such as overdue cases.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 406/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-8
SAP AG 2004
Features for Case Processors
Copying cases
Hierarchical cases
Scripting
Surveys
Delegation of activities
Content management
integration
General Data Tab
Case header attributes in
a structured format
Activities in connectionwith the case can be
created, viewed, and
maintained
Copying of cases – creation of a new case by copying an existing case with the ability to predefinewhich data gets copied to the new case
Cases can be nested under either cases.
Scripting – intelligent guidance tool that provides case instructions for the less experienced user.
Survey tool integration allows users to assign and save attributes in question and answer format. The
case‘s current processing status could be derived from these attributes via Business Add In
implementation.
Direct management of activities from within the application that can be assigned to a person other than
the person in the role of case processor.
Content management integration allows you to structure any linked documents, link archived
documents, send e-mails, and provide an audit trail through versioning of documents. Enhancementswithin Content Management will additionally provide functionality that allows uesrs to assign
individual attributes to linked documents.
General Data Tab:
A) Case header attributes in structured format
B) Activities in connection with the case can be created, viewed, and maintained
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 407/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-9
SAP AG 2004
Case Management Customizing: Topic Objectives
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to:
Configure a case type Customize a case schema with a category hierarchy
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 408/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-10
SAP AG 2004
Case Management Customizing Overview
Basic Case Management Customizing
Settings
Case type definition
Number ranges for cases
Classification catalog
Parameters for copying cases
Case attribute values
Profiles to attach to case types
User status
Text determination
Partner determination
Action profile
Modeling Reference Categories
Assign reference categories in category modeler
The next slides walk through defining a case type, creating and attaching action profile and partnerdetermination profiles, and modeling reference categories in the category modeler.
Text determination profiles and user status profiles are directly attached in the case type definition.
Action profiles and partner determination profiles are attached in separate IMG transactions.
Authorizations According to Case Type: To control user authorizations for an entire cases on the basis
of the case type, you enter the case type in the authorization object S_SCMG_CAS in the field
CASETYPE. You maintain authorization objects in User or Role Maintenance (in the SAP Easy Access
menu, choose Architecture and Technology -> System Administration -> User Maintenance -> User orchoose Architecture and Technology -> System Administration -> User Maintenance -> Role
Administration -> Roles). The authorization objects for Case Management can be found under Cross-
Application Authorization Objects (AAAB).
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 409/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-11
SAP AG 2004
Case Types
Define a new case type
Set an identifier and description for case type.
Set permitted process C_01 for CRM case
management.
Attach profiles such as user status and text
determination procedure.
Set number range and early number
assignment.
Case types can be marked obsolete if no longer
used.
A case type defines the central properties of a case to reflect your business processes. It groups togethervarious settings that influence the following aspects of case processing: permitted values of case
attributes, for example, statuses; system behavior, for example, assignment of case numbers; user
authorizations for cases. If you define more than one case type, users have to specify the relevant case
type when creating a case.
The following case types are predefined in the standard system: C_01 Incident Tracking for general
CRM Case Management and C_02 Dispute Case for managing invoice complaints and payment disputes
in the Telecommunications industry.
Specify the following settings in Define Case Type.
• Identifier and description for the case type
• Process: Processes define a broad application of the Case Management functionality. They are used
to group case types and as a filter for Business Add-Ins, which can be used to implement checks and
industry-specific routines. Note: You must assign the process C_01 to all new case types that you
create, to classify cases of this case type as originating in a SAP CRM Case Management
application, rather than other SAP Case Management applications.
• Assign profiles: Status profile and Text profile.
• …
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 410/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-12
• …
• Internal number range: Enter a number range that you created in the previous IMG activity. The
system automatically assigns a number within this number range to each new case. Note: Number
assignment by users (external number assignment) is not supported.
• Early number assignment - Set this indicator if you want the system to assign a case number when
the case is created, rather than when you first save it. This enables agents using the Interaction Center
WebClient to inform customers of the case number during interaction.
• Case type obsolete - Set this indicator if you want to prevent further cases of this case type from
being created but still allow users to access existing cases of this type.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 411/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-13
SAP AG 2004
Customizing Actions
Actions:
Normal action configuration:
Create the action profile
Define the condition
Assign the action profile tothe case
Integration of the Post Processing Framework (Actions) is available for case management. This is typically used, for example, to trigger follow-up activities and to assign these activities to other
employees. In order to automate this and other processes, the Post Processing Framework is now
integrated with case management, enabling actions to be defined. Using Actions (Post Processing
Framework) you can schedule and start any subsequent processing steps depending on the case type, as
well as the various scheduling and start conditions.
Examples of subsequent processing steps may be sending e-mails or starting workflows. You can also
simply stipulate that a specific ABAP coding is run.
Action configuration can be viewed under:
• SAP Implementation Guide Customer Relationship Management Case Management
Extended Customizing Process Actions
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 412/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-14
SAP AG 2004
Customizing Partners
1. Create a partner determinationprocedure
2. Specify the min./max. no. of partners
3. Assign the partner determinationprocedure to the case type
If an access sequence is
needed, use the BAdI: /CRMS/CMG_PART_DETER
Partner determination procedures can be assigned to the case type to control which business partnersshould be mandatorily associated with a case. The determination procedure can also control the
maximum number of partners allowed.
There is no access sequence attached to partner functions for case management. If an access sequence is
needed, use the BAdi: /CRMS/CMG_PART_DETER
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 413/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-15
SAP AG 2004
Reference Category via Category Modeler Integration
Available reference
categories are defined in a
category schema within theCategory Modeler
application
The category schema gets
assigned to a case type.
Only one category schema
can be assigned to a case
type at any given time but
one category schema can
be assigned to multiple
case types
Activity and Document
Templates can be assigned
on reference category level
The two main business reasons for assigning a reference category to a case are:• Process control
• Hierarchical BW reporting on cases
• Examples: A case worker can make use of the activity templates that are assigned to a reference
category when creating new activities within the case. Assigning reference categories to cases
enables companies to produce hierarchical reports based on the multilevel reference categories. The
reports provide an accurate picture of how many cases have been created in the different business
areas, as represented by the reference categories.
Assignment of category to case type is done through the category modeler.
In CRM 5.0, it is possible to assign only a single reference category to the case.
Prerequisites for using reference categories: Set up a categorization schema in the category modeler.
Release the categorization schema. Assign the categorization schema to a corresponding case type.
Within the category schema you can create multiple nodes either at the same level or a level below. At
each level you give it a label and a description. Activity templates can be assigned levels within the
schema.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 414/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-16
SAP AG 2004
Customizing – Activity Template Assignment toCategorization Node.
1) To create the activity template: SAP Menu: Activities – Maintain activities:
2) Record the transaction number of the activity you have created and
assign it to the reference category level in the category modeler on the
Activity Templates tab:
You can use templates in CRM Enterprise, for example, for generating activities within similar types ofcases.
You create templates directly from a transaction, that is, if you want to create a template for an activity,
you first need to be in the activity processing screen.
In the Easy Access menu, choose Maintain Leads or Maintain Activities. Choose Extras -> Templates -
> Create.
Activity templates can be assigned to reference category levels within a category schema. Then this
activity will appear within a case when the case is associated with that reference category.
The prerequisite for this is that the case type has a category hierarchy assigned which contains the
reference category to which the activity template is assigned.
The bottom half of the slide shows how you can attach the activity‘s document number to a referencecategory level in the category modeler.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 415/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-17
SAP AG 2004
Case Management: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Explain the concept of CRM Case Management Create and process a case
Configure a case type
Perform Customizing settings for case management
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 416/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-18
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 417/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-19
Exercise
Chapter: Case Management
Topic: Creating a Case
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create a Case
• Create a Sub-Case
A contact center agent processes several business transactions relating the
component 3961. An alert informs the agent to create a case to manage allthe information together. The case is assigned to a case processor. The
case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people towork on the case by creating activities to be fulfilled by the team. A casenote is added instructing the team to link all electronic forms to the case.
A service transaction is created in relation to the case.
The contact center agent processes several business transactions relating the component 3961. An
alert informs the agent to create a case to manage all the information together. The case is assignedto a case processor. The case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people to
work on the case by creating activities to be fulfilled by the team. Additionally, a case note is
added instructing the team to link all electronic forms to the case.
1-1 Log on to the Enterprise Portal with the user name provided by your trainer.
2-1 Create a case of the type Incident Tracking to track all the incidents that are occurring.
Enter the following information for your case:
Header ## Megastore Case
Priority Very high
Person Responsible CRM-##Processor 400440 (Lou Windham)
Enter to confirm the data
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 418/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-20
3-1 Now you want to enter the case details.
3-1-1 Add the Business Partner ##Megastore. to the case.
Business Partner tab
Add Entry
Choose Sold-to from the dropdown box in the Partner field.
Use the dropdown in the Business partner field to search for ##Megastore.
Enter ##Megastore in the Name 1 field. Press Go.
Choose the business partner number for ##Megastore.
Enter
3-1-2 Enter a reason for linking the business partner.
Enter a reason in the Link Reason field to the right side of the line where youentered the business partner on the Business Partner tab
3-1-3 Create a case note to record information about the case.
Use the following settings in the drop down boxes:
Short title: Replacement issues with
component
Enter whatever text you would like in the text box.
3-1-4 Add the Installed Base Component 3961.
Component: 3961
Link Reason: Repeated breakdowns
3-1-5 Save your case.
3-1-6 Review the information about the case on the General tab in the summary area.
3-1-7 View the Case record tab. See the information that is linked to the case.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 419/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-21
4-1 Create a new activity for this case.
Select the activity type Contact
Enter the following activity data:
Start Date and Time: Today at 10:00
End Date and Time: Today at 11:00
Activity Partner: ##Megastore
Description: Discuss Issues with components
Priority: High
Enter
4-1-1 Attach a relevant document to the case.
Choose any document you like and give it a name.
4-1-2 Create a new Service Process which will be associated with this case.
Give a reason for the creation of the service order in the link reason field.
4-1-3 Save the Case.
4-2 Since the issues are more widespread than immediately thought, you will want to create a
new case to hold information on the case you just created as well as other future cases that
undoubtedly will occur.
4-1-4 Create a new case
Header ##Umbrella Case
Processor 400440 (Lou Windham)
4-2-2 Add ##Megastore as the sold-to party on the business partners tab.
4-2-3 Add your previously created case as a sub-case.
See how it appears as a sub-item.
4-2-4 Save your new case.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 420/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-22
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 421/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-23
Solution
Chapter: Case Management
Topic: Creating a Case
The contact center agent processes several business transactions relating the component 3961. Analert informs the agent to create a case to manage all the information together. The case is assigned
to a case processor. The case processor reviews the case history and assigns a team of people to
work on the case by creating activities to be fulfilled by the team. Additionally, a case note is
added instructing the team to link all electronic forms to the case.
1-1 Log on to the Enterprise Portal with the user name provided by your trainer.
2-1 Create a case of the type Incident Tracking to track all the incidents that are occurring.
Navigate to Service & Support → Case Management.
Choose New.
In the drop down box, choose Incident Tracking .
Enter the following information for your case:
Header: ## Megastore Case
Priority: Very high
Person Responsible: CRM-##
Processor: 400440 (Lou Windham)
Enter to confirm the data
3-1 Now you want to enter the case details.
3-1-1 Add the Business Partner ##Megastore. To the case.
Business Partner tab Add Entry
Choose Sold-to from the dropdown box in the Partner field.
Use the dropdown in the Business partner field to search for ##Megastore.
Enter ##Megastore in the Name 1 field. Press Go.
Choose the business partner number for ##Megastore.
Enter
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 422/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-24
3-1-2 Enter a reason for linking the business partner.
Enter a reason in the Link Reason field to the right side of the line where you
entered the business partner on the Business Partner tab
3-1-3 Create a case note to record information about the case.
General tab
Use the following settings in the drop down boxes:
Short title: Replacement issues with
component
Enter whatever text you would like in the text box.
3-1-4 Add the Installed Base Component 3961.
Reference Object tab
Add Entry
Component: 3961
Link Reason: Repeated breakdowns
3-1-5 Save your case.
3-1-6 Review the information about the case on the General tab in the summary area.
3-1-7 View the Case record tab. See the information that is linked to the case.
4-1 Create a new activity for this case.
4-1-1 Go to the Activities tab to create a new activity.
Choose New
Select the activity type Contact
Enter the following activity data:
Start Date and Time: Today at 10:00
End Date and Time: Today at 11:00
Activity Partner: ##Megastore
Description: Discuss Issues with components
Priority: High Enter
4-1-2 Attach a relevant document to the case.
Attachments tab
Choose Add Document
Choose Browse to look for a document
Choose any document you like and give it a name.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 423/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-25
Choose Add Document .
4-1-3 Create a new Service Process which will be associated with this case.
Go to the Transactions tab
Choose New
Choose Service Process
Give a reason for the creation of the service order in the link reason field.
4-1-4 Save the Case.
4-2 Since the issues are more widespread than immediately thought, you will want to create a newcase to hold information on the case you just created as well as other future cases that
undoubtedly will occur.
4-2-2 Create a new case
Choose New
Choose Incident Tracking
Header: ##Umbrella Case
Processor: 400440 (Lou Windham)
Enter
4-2-2 Add ##Megastore as the sold-to party on the business partners tab.
Business Partner tab
Add Entry
Choose Sold-to from the dropdown box in the Partner field.
Use the dropdown in the Business partner field to search for ##Megastore.
Enter ##Megastore in the Name 1 field. Press Go.
Choose the business partner number for ##Megastore.
Enter
4-2-3 Add your previously created case as a sub-case.
Go to the Hierarchy tab
Add Entry
Choose the dropdown search on the Case ID field .
Search All Cases
Go
Choose your case.
See how it appears as a sub-item.
4-2-4 Save your new case.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 424/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-26
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 425/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-27
Exercises
Unit: Case Management
Topic: Case Management Customizing
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to:
• Create your own case type.
• Create your own hierarchy in the category modeler
• Create and assign an activity template to a node in the category
modeler
• Use case management
You need to be able to classify your cases further by the types of products associated with the cases. You can do this by creating
hierarchical categories (category schema) and by associating this
category schema with a new case type. In addition these categories
can have attached templates for activities frequently needed. Youwould also like to set mandatory partners for your case type.
1-1 Create a new case type ZC##, with description CASE##.
1-1-1 Logon to the SAP GUI with the user and password provided by your instructor to create
a new case type as a copy of C_01 (Incident Tracking) in the IMG.
1-1-2 For this new CASE## the Employee Responsible partner function is mandatory and
must exist at least once. Create a new partner determination procedure ZCMP##
with this setting and attach it to your case type.
1-1-3 Logon to the portal with the user and password provided by your instructor.
Create a new schema with the following data:
Name: Schema##
Description: Schema##
From Date: today (important)
Valid time from: 10 min forward (importan
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 426/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-28
Make sure that you have changed the default date and time to the
corresponding settings.
The hierarchy should be assigned to your CASE## transaction type.
As a next step, create a category hierarchy like this:
• PC problem##
• Monitor##
• Disk##
Set the status to released and save.
1-1-4 Under the Disk node, attach an activity template that you base on a normal activity but
with your own description. Create this activity template in the SAP GUI of CRM.
1-1-5 Logon to the portal again.
Create a new case with your new case transaction type.
Assign your category hierarchy node to your case type and see if you can use the activity
template.
Notice that the assignment to the category is based on the date above so you have to waituntil the assignment date has been reached.
Add a case note “Description”.
Save the case.
1-1-6 Are you able to copy the case using the corresponding button?
Make a setting so that copying your case with all notes is allowed.
Try your setting and especially check where the copied text notes appear.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 427/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 428/439
© SAP AG CR700 11-30
1-1-3 Logon to the portal with the user and password given to you by your instructor.
Create a new schema with the following data:
Name: Schema##
Description: Schema##
From Date: today (important)
Valid time from: 10 min forward (importan
Make sure that you have changed the default date and time to the
corresponding settings.
The hierarchy should be assigned to your CASE## case type.
Choose Knowledge Management Category Modeler .
Choose New
Schema.
Put in Name and Description
Put in From Date as today + 10 minutes
Click on the Application Areas tab.
Click on Add Entry
Choose application Case Management
Value: ZC##
As a next step, create a category hierarchy like this:• PC problem##
• Monitor##
• Disk##
Click on the Categories tab.
Click Create Subnode
Put in PC problem## as label and description
Click create a subnode
Put in Monitor##
Click Create same level node
Put in Disk##
Release the category hierarchy and set the status to Released .
On the General Data tab set the status to Released
Save your settings.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 429/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 430/439
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 431/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-1
SAP AG 2004
Appendix
1. Overview of CRM Service
2. Installed Base Management and
Individual Objects
3. Service Agreements and
Service Contracts
4. Service Plans
5. Usage-Based Service Contracts
6. Service Order Management
7. Product Service Letter
8. Complaints and Returns
9. In-House Repair
10. Warranty Claims
11. Case Management
Units
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 432/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-2
SAP AG 2004
Service
Items List
Gantt Area
Employees
Time
Assignments
Resource Planning Tool
The resource planning tool provides the resource planner with access to all information relevant forresource planning, that is, the service tasks to be completed and the time availability of the individual
service employees. Times always refer to the reference time zone for the resource planning tool. You
can also set other time zones. The system displays all time data with reference to the time zone selected.
When you start the resource planning tool, the service team that the resource planner is responsible for,
or the one that he last processed, displays automatically and an initial processing period is determined. If
the system cannot determine the service team, the resource planner must select it manually in the locator.
A service employee assignment is created when the resource planner assigns a service task to a serviceemployee. These assignments are represented as a horizontal bar in the Gantt area. The position of the
horizontal bar represents the duration (that is, start and finish) of the assignment. The color of the
horizontal bar changes in accordance with the assignment status. You can see the assignment status, the
number of the relevant service process, and the customer data in the horizontal bar.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 433/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-3
SAP AG 2004
Locator:
search
and select
service
teams
Service Items List:
all service tasks
Sort/Filter function
Gantt Area:
availability
service
employee
assignments
Resource Planning Tool: Areas
Gantt Area: In addition to assignments, availability and availability descriptions display here. Theresource planner can use the calendar function to go to a specific day. Availability displays as
background, assignments and availability descriptions as horizontal bars, tasks and business activities as
symbols.
The colors have the following meanings:
• White (background): Employee is available
• Grey (background): Employee is not available
• Green: Assignment has the status completed
• Yellow: Everything is okay with the assignment
• Red: The assignment must be checked. It has, for example, the status rejected and must be assignedto another employee.
• Red striped: The service employee is not assigned to the service team for this period.
You can open a service item directly from the service items list.
The technicians’ tasks and activities also display in the Gantt area if the flag Display Business
Activity/Task is marked in the resource planner’s user settings.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 434/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-4
SAP AG 2004
Maintain availability description
Maintain assignment
Change assignment status Communication:
Send short message to employee
Call employee or businesspartner
Service Employee:
Sort
Display/change detailedinformation
Gantt Area:
Change processing period
Change reference time zone
Hide time ranges
Resource Planning Tool: Functions
Availability description: Specifies details about the period, availability type, the service employee and,if required, a comment about availability. You can also change the duration of the availability
description directly in the Gantt area by dragging the horizontal bar at one end.
Create assignment: Select a task in the service item list and call up a horizontal bar in the Gantt area.
Alternative: Select a service task from the service item list, select a service employee in the Gantt area,
choose Assignment , enter start, finish, and additional data in the dialog box. Existing assignments are
not influenced by assignments that have been newly created. A time overlay of several assignments to
one service employee is possible.
Create several assignments: Select a service task from the service item list and, while holding down
the Shift key, select several service employees, right-click and choose Schedule from the context menu.
Change assignment: If you use drag & drop to move the assignment to another service employee, the
length of the horizontal bar stays the same, but the status is reset to status released .
Change assignment status: Open the detail window and choose the status required.
For sending short messages and for calling, communication data (telephone number or e-mail) must be
maintained in the business partner master record for the business partner. For calling, the telephony
integration must be active.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 435/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-5
SAP AG 2004
Automatic Scheduling of Service Items
Assignments are created automatically in the Resource Planning
Tool when the service order is saved
Can be defined for a particular item category
Multi-User Concept within the Resource Planning Tool It is now possible for more than one Resource Planner to access
the Resource Planning Tool in Change mode at any one time
A BAdI is provided that
enables assignments to be
rescheduled if scheduling
relevant data has changed in
the service order
Assignment Processing
Archiving of Assignments with the Service Order• Functionality was also backported to mySAPCRM Release 3.0
Customizable Colors of Assignments with the Service Order
• Assignment colors can be set in Customizing
• Colors depend on the status of the assignment (Released, Communicated, Completed)
PRP Assignments in the Resource Planning Tool
• Project Resource Planning assignments can display in the Resource Planning Tool
• It is possible to branch directly from a Project Systems assignment into the PS project itself
Tasks and Activities in the Resource Planning Tool• CRM tasks and activities can be displayed in the Resource Planning Tool
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 436/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-6
SAP AG 2004
The Resource Planner selects one or more service items that have not yet
been assigned and then selects one or more service employees to whom the
work could be assigned.
The system proposes possible assignments based on the scheduling
strategy selected. The Resource Planner is then able to accept or reject the
assignments as required.
Automatic Scheduling
2 Hr 1 Hrs
3 Hrs
Service items
Helen Curtis Vacation
Break
Break
Break
Break
Break
?
?
Employees 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
?
Jill Holding
Bob Star
Claire Hope
Dan HeathPete Joiner
?
You can use automatic scheduling as an alternative to, or in addition to the manual scheduling ofassignments. This function enables the system to determine when a service employee is available to
complete a specified service task. The determination is made using the duration specified in the service
item.
Optimization does not occur during automatic scheduling, it is simply a determination of the time
gaps in a resource planner’s assignment plan and an assignment proposal. If no relevant gaps are found
for the duration of the assignment between the customer required start and the customer required finish,
the system generates a corresponding message.
Prerequisites: To use automatic scheduling, you must have maintained scheduling strategies in the
Workforce Management Core.
You can use the following scheduling strategies for the automatic scheduling:
• Forward scheduling
• Forward scheduling with finish date
• Backward scheduling
• Backward scheduling with start date
The proposal function can support the resource planner when free slots need to be found for one or more
service items, based strictly on employee availability. Example: An in-house PC support group in
which all team members are qualified to resolve the typical IT problems.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 437/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-7
SAP AG 2004
Workforce Management (WFM) Core
CRMWFM Core
AddOn
with Built-In
Dispatcher
APOWFM Core
AddOnwith Built-In
or liveCache
Dispatcher
WFM (Workforce Management) Core
is a component required in order toperform scheduling and contains the
following information:
Time data
(e.g. Employee availability data from
mySAP HCM, work schedule)
Resources
Object that represents the CRM
Business Partner in the role ‘Employee’ in
WFM Core
Demands – Service order items
Assignments – The link between a
Resource and a Demand
To do semiautomatic scheduling and appointment scheduling, you can use the WFM Core AddOn or theWFM Core in an APO Release 4.0.
Both dispatcher (Build-In and liveCache) support this. If you use the WFM Core in an APO Release
lower than 4.0, you have to use the life Cache for semiautomatic scheduling. Appointment Scheduling is
not possible with these APO Releases.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 438/439
© SAP AG CR700 12-8
SAP AG 2004
Resource
Planner
Patricia Preston
Peter Johnson
Prerequisites: Organization
Service
Team
Jim BrownJoe Miller
Mary Black
A service team can be scheduled only by one resource planner at one time. In exceptional cases theresource planner can also take over the planning for another service team.
Each service employee is assigned to exactly one service team. Service employees are grouped, for
example, according to tasks to be completed or geographical criteria.
Service Employees: Service employees are managed in the system as business partners of the role
Employee. You must create master records as business partners for each service employee and can
assign business partner to a system user and a personnel number.
Service Organization: You have defined your organizational units and the organizational structure in
the following way: You have flagged organizational units that should be displayed in the resource
planning tool as Service Team. You have assigned positions to each service organization. You have
assigned a business partner (that is, a service employee) to each position; each service employee must
be assigned to exactly one service organization. If you want to assign a service employee to anotherservice organization, enter a date as a time limit up until which the service employee is responsible to
the other service organization. Ensure that the dates for the assignments to the different service
organizations do not overlap, so that assignment is unique.
In Organizational Data Management, you have assigned a resource planner to a service team using
Goto → Resource Planner Assignment and have assigned a position to this resource planner. The
system users or business partners assigned to this position are the resource planners.
8/10/2019 CR700 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cr700-service 439/439
SAP AG 2004
Service
Process ItemService Task
Category Partner
Date
Relevancy
Status
ServiceProduct
Duration
Prerequisites: Service Process
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled so that the service process items can be read as servicetasks in the service item list:
The leading business transaction category for the relevant transaction type must be Service. The item
object type must be Service Process Item (BUS2000140).